CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 247
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 80
.............Accessory Power Socket . 108
..................Active Head Restraints . 96
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 291
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21
...Airbags, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 32
..........AdvancedAirbagSystem .26
.............................Airbag Service . 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 24
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 29
........................SRS Components . 21
..............Air Conditioning System . 110
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 315
......................................Antifreeze . 294
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 60, 266
...................................Operation . 266
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 206
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 80
............................................Armrest . 97
................................Audio System . 114
.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83
.........................Auto Door Locking . 83
.....................Auto Door Unlocking . 85
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19
.............Automatic Speed Control . 209
..............Automatic Transmission . 260
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 355
...............Checking Fluid Level . 298
.......................................Shifting . 260
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 260
................Shift Lever Positions . 261
....................Shift Lock Release . 263
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 65, 339
............................Jump Starting . 334
..............................Maintenance . 322
............................Specifications . 356
..............................Before Driving . 237
....................................Belts,Seat .8,18
.........................Beverage Holders . 108
........
HandsFreeLink . 212
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 266
.............Break-in, New Linings . 238
....................Bulb Replacement . 305
...........................................Fluid . 300
.................Pad Wear Indicators . 265
.......................................Parking . 105
.................System Indicator . 59, 341
.............................Braking System . 265
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 238
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 75
Bluetooth
Index
A B
INDEX
I
＊
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 305
..............................Brake Lights . 305
........Front Side Marker Lights . 304
.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 304
.........................Headlights . 302, 303
.........High-mount Brake Light . 307
..........................Parking Lights . 304
.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 305
..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 305
............................Specifications . 355
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 302
.........................................Card, PC . 171
............................Capacities Chart . 355
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51
.............................Carrying Cargo . 249
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
..............................CD Player . 125, 162
..................................Ceiling Light . 105
........................Certification Label . 352
............................................Chains . 321
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 327
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 292
......................................When to . 281
...Charging System Indicator . 65, 339
..............Check Fuel Cap Message . 69
............Checklist, Before Driving . 255
.....................................Child Safety . 33
Child Seats
.............LATCH Anchor System . 42
...........................Lower Anchors . 42
................Tether Anchor Points . 45
..................Childproof Door Locks . 82
.........................Clock, Setting the . 207
...................................Clutch Fluid . 301
........................CO in the Exhaust . 363
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 256
..............................Compact Spare . 326
.................Console Compartment . 108
.................Consumer Information . 370
.............Controls, Instruments and . 55
Coolant
........................................Adding . 294
....................................Checking . 243
.........................Proper Solution . 294
...................Temperature Gauge . 70
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 363
............Cruise Control Operation . 209
....Customer Service Information . 370
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 56
................Daytime Running Lights . 74
.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 372
........................Defog and Defrost . 113
................Defogger, Rear Window . 76
..............Defrosting the Windows . 113
....................................Dimensions . 354
...............Dimming the Headlights . 73
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 298
..................................Engine Oil . 241
..........................Directional Signals . 73
Disc Brake Pad Wear
...................................Indicators . 265
............................Disc Player . 125, 162
..................Display Change Button . 66
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 294
Index
C
D
II
＊
CONTINUED
Doors
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83
.....................Auto Door Locking . 83
.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85
..............Locking and Unlocking . 81
......................Power Door Locks . 82
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357
Downshifting, Manual
.............................Transmission . 257
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 253
....................................Economy . 244
..................................Guidelines . 254
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 310
..............................Economy, Fuel . 244
............Emergencies on the Road . 325
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 334
...........Brake System Indicator . 341
................Changing a Flat Tire . 327
.....Charging System Indicator . 339
..................Checking the Fuses . 342
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 339
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 340
..................Overheated Engine . 337
.........................Emergency Brake . 105
......................Emergency Flashers . 76
......................Emergency Towing . 348
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 89
.......................Emissions Controls . 363
........................Emissions Testing . 366
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70
......Engine Speed Limiter . 259, 262
Malfunction Indicator
......................................Lamp . 340
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 339
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 290
...............................Overheating . 337
............................Specifications . 354
.......................................Starting . 256
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 238
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 363
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 16
...................................Fan, Interior . 110
.........................................Features . 109
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 239
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 310
...............................................Oil . 292
5-speed Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 299
................................Shifting the . 257
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 327
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 298
..........................................Brake . 300
.........................................Clutch . 301
...................................Locations . 288
..............Manual Transmission . 299
..........................Power Steering . 301
..................Windshield Washer . 297
FM Stereo Radio
...................................Reception . 199
........................................Fog Lights . 74
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 97
..........................Four-way Flashers . 76
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 24
Index
F
E
INDEX
III
.................................................Fuel . 238
......................Fill Door and Cap . 239
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 238
...............................Oxygenated . 238
........................Reserve Indicator . 64
........................Tank, Filling the . 239
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 342
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 244
.........................................Gasoline . 238
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 64
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 238
........................Tank, Filling the . 239
................Gas Station Procedures . 239
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70
...............................................Fuel . 70
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 260
..............Manual Transmission . 257
......................................Glove Box . 108
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 302
...........................HandsFreeLink
. 212
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76
Headlights
........................................Aiming . 302
............Daytime Running Lights . 74
..................High Beam Indicator . 61
........................Reminder Beeper . 73
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 302
...................................Turning on . 73
..............................Head Restraints . 94
.............................Heated Mirrors . 104
.....................Heating and Cooling . 110
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 256
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 73
..............High-mount Brake Light . 307
.......................Hood, Opening the . 240
..............................................Horn .4,71
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 352
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 78
...........................................Switch . 80
............Timing Control System . 364
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59
...............................Infant Restraint . 38
Infant Seats
.............LATCH Anchor System . 42
...........................Lower Anchors . 42
................Tether Anchor Points . 45
Inflation, Recommended Tire
...................................Pressures . 315
........................Information Display . 67
.................................Inside Mirror . 103
.............................Inspection, Tire . 316
............................Instrument Panel . 57
................Instrument Panel Lights . 59
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75
..............Instruments and Controls . 55
...............................Interior Lights . 105
........................................Introduction . i
.......................................iPod
. 133, 184
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 328
.......................................Jack, Tire . 327
Index
H
I
G
J
IV
＊
CONTINUED
..................................................Keys . 78
................................Jump Starting . 334
.......................Label, Certification . 352
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 73
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19
.................LATCH Anchor System . 42
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 302
.......................................Indicator . 59
.........................................Parking . 73
..................................Turn Signal . 73
....................................Load Limits . 250
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80
............................Fuel Fill Door . 239
.................................Power Door . 82
...........................................Trunk . 88
........................Low Coolant Level . 243
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64
................................Lower Anchors . 42
...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 257
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 339
Low Tire Pressure
.............................Indicator . 63, 270
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 355
...................Neutral Gear Position . 261
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 238
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 258
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 352
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 238
.........................................Odometer . 67
...............................Odometer, Trip . 68
Oil
........................Change, How to . 292
......................Change, When to . 281
......................Checking Engine . 241
..............Pressure Indicator . 65, 339
.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 290
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 363
............................Outside Mirrors . 104
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 68
....................Overheating, Engine . 337
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 286
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 238
..................................Maintenance . 279
................................Minder . 281-287
.........................Minder Indicator . 65
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 286
..........................................Safety . 280
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 340
...................Manual Transmission . 257
........Manual Transmission Fluid . 299
...............................Meters, Gauges . 66
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 238
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 104
.......................................Moonroof . 102
...........................MP3/WMA . 126, 163
Index
M
N
O
K
L
INDEX
V
＊
＊
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 372
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18
...............Additional Information . 18
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19
........................Maintenance . 20, 309
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 18, 59
...................Radiator Overheating . 337
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 115
Radio/CD/PC Card Sound
........................................System . 149
...........................Readiness Codes . 340
Rear Lights, Bulb
.......................Replacement . 305-307
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 97
..........................Rear View Mirror . 103
.................Rear Window Defogger . 76
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 93
.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 258
.............................Reminder Lights . 59
................Remote Audio Controls . 204
.......................Remote Transmitter . 90
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 310
................Engine Oil and Filter . 292
..........................................Fuses . 342
................................Light Bulbs . 302
................Maintenance Minder . 281
...........................................Tires . 319
.............................Wiper Blades . 311
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 20
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 372
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 243, 294
...............................Restraint, Child . 33
..................Reverse Gear Position . 261
................................Rotation, Tire . 318
..............Panel Brightness Control . 75
........................Park Gear Position . 261
...........................................Parking . 264
...............................Parking Brake . 105
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 59, 341
.................................Parking Lights . 73
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 365
.............................PGM-FI System . 364
........................Playing a Disc . 125, 162
.........................Playing a PC Card . 171
..................Playing the Radio . 116, 149
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
........................Protecting Children . 33
.....................General Guidelines . 33
...........................Protecting Infants . 38
...........Protecting Larger Children . 47
.............Protecting Small Children . 39
Index
R
S
P
VI
＊
CONTINUED
Seat Belts
...................System Components . 18
...............Use During Pregnancy . 16
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 93
............................Security System . 208
...............................Serial Number . 352
...........................Service Intervals . 281
...........................Service Manual . 373
.........Service Station Procedures . 239
..........................Setting the Clock . 207
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 260
........................Shift Lock Release . 263
................................Side Airbags . 9, 27
..........................Off Indicator . 30, 60
..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 29
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.......................Replacement . 304-305
...............................Signaling Turns . 73
.....................................Snow Tires . 321
................................Sound System . 114
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 326
............................Specifications . 356
....................Specifications Charts . 354
................................Speed Control . 209
Speed-sensitive Volume
.......Compensation (SVC) . 119, 160
.......................................Spotlights . 106
..........SRS, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 32
..........AdvancedAirbagSystem .26
.............................Airbag Service . 31
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
How the SRS Indicator
.......................................Works . 29
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 24
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 29
........................SRS Components . 21
.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 60
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 80
.......................Starting the Engine . 256
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 256
................With a Dead Battery . 334
........Steam Coming from Engine . 337
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 77
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80
...................Stereo Sound System . 114
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 324
Supplemental Restraint
..................................System .9,21
......................................Servicing . 31
.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 60
...................System Components . 21
.........................................SVC . 119, 160
..................................Synthetic Oil . 291
Taillights, Changing
...................................Bulbs . 305-306
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 325
Index
T
INDEX
VII
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357
.....Emissions Control Systems . 363
....................Emissions Testing . 366
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 238
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 364
.................................Tire Labeling . 359
.......................Temperature Gauge . 70
.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45
............................Theft Protection . 208
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 365
..........................Time, Setting the . 207
....................................Tire Chains . 321
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 327
.........................Tire Information . 357
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
................................(TPMS) . 270
.............................Indicator . 63, 271
Required Federal
..........................Explanation . 361
...............................................Tires . 314
..............................Air Pressure . 315
.........................Checking Wear . 316
..........................Compact Spare . 326
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 357
..................High Speed Driving . 316
......................................Inflation . 314
..................................Inspection . 316
..............................Maintenance . 318
...................................Replacing . 319
......................................Rotating . 318
................................Service Life . 317
...........................................Snow . 321
....................Specifications . 320, 356
................................Tire Chains . 321
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 327
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 273
..................Emergency Towing . 348
...........................Traction Devices . 321
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 298
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 299
..................Fluid Selection . 298, 299
..............Identification Number . 352
.............Shifting the Automatic . 260
..................Shifting the Manual . 257
...................................Treadwear . 357
.......................................Trip Meter . 68
................................................Trunk . 88
........................................Opening . 88
...................Open Monitor Light . 61
....................................Turn Signals . 73
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 325
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 357
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 238
USB Adapter
..................Cable . 135, 144, 186, 194
.USB Flash Memory Device . 141, 191
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 294
................................Vanity Mirror . 107
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 250
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 354
....Vehicle Identification Number . 352
.............................Vehicle Storage . 324
.................................................VIN . 352
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 291
Index
U
V
VIII
＊
.............................XM Radio . 120, 153
Vehicle Stability Assist
.....................(VSA
) System . 268
............Activation Indicator . 62, 268
..................................Off Switch . 269
.................System Indicator . 62, 268
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52
....................Warranty Coverages . 371
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 297
.......................................Indicator . 64
.....................................Operation . 72
.............................................Wheel . 313
...............Adjusting the Steering . 77
............Alignment and Balance . 318
..........................Compact Spare . 326
...............................Nut Wrench . 328
Windows
................Operating the Power . 101
...........................Rear, Defogger . 76
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 72
...................................Defroster . 113
.......................................Washers . 72
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 311
.....................................Operation . 72
............................Worn Tires . 316, 317
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 348
:U.S. only
Index
INDEX
W
X
IX
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Civic 4-door. You may find descriptions
of equipment and features that are not on
your particular model.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33SNAC40
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Civic was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
i
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
Introduction
WARNING:
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component.
ii
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
These signal words mean:
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
on the vehicle.
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
(fluid capacities and tire pressures)
(main controls)
(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)
(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)
(heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control)
(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)
(engine and transmission operation)
(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)
(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)
(warranty and contact information)
(how to order)
(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)
Contents
................................................................................................................................................Index .I
..................................................Service Information Summary . last page
...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance .3
............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety .5
..........................................Instruments and Controls .55
.......................................Features .109
.......................................................................Before Driving .237
.........................................................................................Driving .253
.................................................Maintenance .279
..............................................Technical Information .351
..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 369
..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) .373
........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected .325
INDEX
1
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
What gasoline to use, how to break-
in your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Driver and Passenger Safety
Instruments and Controls
Features
Before Driving
Driving
Technical Information
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
Index
Service Information Summary
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Maintenance
Overview of Contents
2
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
CONTINUED
: If equipped
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
GAUGES
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
AUDIO SYSTEM
MOONROOF SWITCH PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG
MIRROR CONTROLS
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
DOOR LOCK TAB
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
(P.104)
(P.66)
(P.114)
(P.102)
(P.9, 30)
(P.110)
(P.81)
(P.108)
(P.100)
(P.88)
(P.101)
(P.82)
(P.9, 24)
(P.57)
(P.239)
(P.205)
(P.260)
(P.257)
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
1:
2:
3:
4:
Si model
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
HORN
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
HEATED MIRRORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS BUTTONS
DISPLAY CHANGE
BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
SEL/RESET BUTTON
(P.75)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.77)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.30)
(P.72)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.73)
FOG LIGHTS (P.74)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) OFF SWITCH
(P.269)
(P.204)
(P.212)
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.240)
(P.209)
(P.104)
1
2
2
2
3
4
2
4
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........
Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16
...Additional Safety Precautions . 17
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 18
..Seat Belt System Components . 18
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 21
......Airbag System Components . 21
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 24
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 29
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 30
.............................Airbag Service . 31
...Additional Safety Precautions . 32
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 33
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 33
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 34
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 36
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 36
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 38
.......................Protecting Infants . 38
.........Protecting Small Children . 39
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40
....................Installing a Child Seat . 41
...............................With LATCH . 42
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44
..............................With a Tether . 45
...........Protecting Larger Children . 47
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47
..................Using a Booster Seat . 48
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 49
...Additional Safety Precautions . 50
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51
...................................Safety Labels . 52
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
−You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.14
33 50
281
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Restrain All Children
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Don’t Drink and Drive
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Saf ely
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Control Your Speed
6
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(2)
(2)
(8)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(9)
(3)
(1) (4)
(6)
(10)
(5)
(11)
(12)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(11) Door Locks
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Table of Contents
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact (see page
for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
27
2924
CONTINUED
Airbags
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
10
Table of Contents
−
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
Your vehicle has a door-open
indicator on the instrument panel to
indicate when any door is open.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door-
open indicator works.
Some models have the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page .
33 37
81
61
83
CONTINUED
Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page ).77
93
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults and Teens
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Table of Contents
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
93
94
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Table of Contents
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
button and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
18
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
RELEASE BUTTON
Table of Contents
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
thebeltandincreasethechanceof
serious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
26 27
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
18
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy.
14
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
If a side curtain airbag deploys
during a side impact, the tensioner
on that side of the vehicle will also
deploy.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
extra tension in the seat belt could
be helpful.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
309
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
20
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
(9)
(8)
(1) (2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(13)
(10)
(14)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(10)
(12) (11)
(7)
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Automatic Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
Table of Contents
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
Your airbag system includes:
24
27
29
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
(16)
(15)
(15)
(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags
Table of Contents
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether
a child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the
control unit to turn the airbag
off (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight
of an infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the
frontpassenger’sseatbeltare
latched or unlatched (see page
).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
19
28
26
29
30
30
18
26
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Table of Contents
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
26
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
not latched
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Table of Contents
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS
Table of Contents
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Back seat passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
Also,makesurethefloormatbehind
the front passenger’s seat is properly
positioned on the floor (see page
). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the front passenger’s seat and its
sensors.
30
310
CONTINUED
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Table of Contents
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if position
sensors detect a child has leaned into
the side airbag’s deployment path,
the airbag will shut off.
30
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
Table of Contents
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
CONTINUED
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Table of Contents
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them. This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
60
How the Passenger Airbag Of f
Indicator Works
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
not mean
not
30
Canada
U.S.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Table of Contents
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
maycomeonandoffrepeatedlyif
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
An airbag ever inflates.
Airbag Service
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring f or any
reason.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Do not remove or modif y a f ront
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
32
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properlyrestrainedwhentheyridein
a vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
38 46
47 50
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Table of Contents
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page ), please
follow these guidelines:
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
47
26
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag.
Infants
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
U.S. Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Dashboard
Sun Visor
Sun Visor
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
47
15
14
93
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Protecting Children General Guidelines
36
Table of Contents
−
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Children
who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
44 45
82
89
Additional Safety Precautions
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your vehicle is not in use.Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Table of Contents
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Inf ants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a f orward-facing position.
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Rear-f acing Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
38
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Table of Contents
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
26
Selecting a Child Seat
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Saf ety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Saf ety Standard 213.
1.
40
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
The child seat should f it the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Table of Contents
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at the outer
rear seats.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
42
LOWER ANCHORS
Rigid type
BUTTON
Table of Contents
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
6.
5.
4.
7.
95
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
TETHER STRAP
HOOK
Flexible type
ANCHOR
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
44
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using one of the
anchorage points shown above.
4. 5.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
COVER
ANCHORAGE POINTS
ANCHOR
Table of Contents
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Lift the anchor cover, then attach
the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
1.
2.
3.
44
Installing a Child Seat
46
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Outer Position
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
Center Position
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
Table of Contents
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Table of Contents
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states, provinces or
territories where you intend to drive.3.
4.
5.
40
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
48
Table of Contents
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
14
47
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Protecting Larger Children
50
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows,
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
Safety Labels
52
DASHBOARD SUN VISOR
RADIATOR CAP
Table of Contents
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
DOORJAMBS
Table of Contents
54
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................
Control Locations . 56
............................Instrument Panel . 57
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 59
.............................................Gauges . 66
..............Display Change Button . 66
....................Information Display . 67
..................................Fuel Gauge . 70
...................Temperature Gauge . 70
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 71
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 72
.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 73
............Daytime Running Lights . 74
........................................Fog Lights . 74
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75
.................Hazard Warning Button . 76
.................Rear Window Defogger . 76
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 77
...............................Keys and Locks . 78
........................Immobilizer System . 79
................................Ignition Switch . 80
......................................Door Locks . 81
......................Power Door Locks . 82
..............Childproof Door Locks . 82
.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 83
.....................Auto Door Locking . 83
.................Auto Door Unlocking . 85
................................................Trunk . 88
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 89
.......................Remote Transmitter . 90
.................................................Seats . 93
..................................Seat Heaters . 100
............................Power Windows . 101
.......................................Moonroof . 102
...........................................Mirrors . 103
...............................Parking Brake . 105
...............................Interior Lights . 105
.........Interior Convenience Items . 107
.....................Beverage Holders . 108
.........Accessory Power Socket . 108
..................................Glove Box . 108
.............Console Compartment . 108
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
55
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
＊ If equipped:
Control Locations
56
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
AUDIO SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
MOONROOF SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKET
DOOR LOCK TAB
GAUGES
MIRROR CONTROLS
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
SEAT HEATER SWITCHESAUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.57)
(P.66)
(P.104)
(P.82)
(P.101)
(P.88)
(P.100)
(P.108)
(P.81)
(P.110)
(P.114)
(P.102)
(P.239)
(P.205)
(P.260)
(P.257)
Table of Contents
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.
Canadian DX-G model with M/T has the electric power steering (EPS) indicator (see page 62) next to the immobilizer system indicator.
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
DX, DX-G (Canada), LX (U.S.), LX-S (U.S.), Sport (Canada), EX (U.S.), EX-L
57
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P. 60)
TRUNK-OPEN
INDICATOR
DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
INDICATOR
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.64)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.61)
(P.60) (P.61) (P.61)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.64)
(P.63)
(P.60)
(P.61)
(P.59)
(P.64)
(P.62)
(P.62)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.65)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.59)
(P.61)
(P.65, 339)
(P.65, 339)
(P.65, 340)
(P.65, 281)
Table of Contents
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instrument Panel
Si
58
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR REV LIMIT INDICATOR
DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
DAYTIME
RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR
(P.65) (P.64)
(P.60)
(P.62)
(P.61)
(P.61)
(P.62)
(P.64)
(P.62)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.64)
(P.60)
(P.63)
(P.59)
(P.61)
(P.61)
(P.60)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.59)
(P.63)
(P.64)
(P.60)(P.61)(P.61)
(P.65, 339)
(P.65, 339)
(P.65, 281)
(P.65, 340)
Table of Contents
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
This indicator reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
1.
2.
18
341
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
59
U.S. Canada
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page ).
29
30 79
266
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
60
U.S. Canada
Table of Contents
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
with a circuit. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
This indicator comes on if the trunk
lid is not closed tightly.
This indicator comes on if any door
is not closed tightly.
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
73
74
74
304 305
Si model only
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Trunk-open Indicator
Door-open Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
61
Table of Contents
If equipped If equipped
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. See page for more
information on the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and goes off
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem
in the electric power steering system.
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the
engine. The indicator will not turn
off immediately. If it does not go off
after driving a short distance, or
comes back on again while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. With the indicator
on, the EPS may be off, making the
vehicle harder to steer.
1.
2.
3.
268
268
268
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Electric Power Steering
(EPS) Indicator
Si and Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission models
62
Table of Contents
If you turn the steering wheel to the
full left or right position repeatedly
while stopping or driving at very low
speed, you may feel slightly harder
steering due to overheating of the
steering gearbox.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). For more
information, see page .
327
348
270
U.S. models onlyU.S. models only
Instrument Panel Indicators
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
63
Table of Contents
If equipped
If equipped
Canadian models only
Si model only
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page ).
To protect the engine from damage,
never drive with the tachometer in
its red zone.
This indicator shows you when the
engine speed is near the tachometer’s
red zone. When the engine speed
gets to near the red zone, the
indicator blinks. If you exceed the
maximum speed for the gear you are
in, the indicator stays on, and you
may feel the engine cut in and out
due to the engine speed limiter (see
page ).
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 1.9 US gal (7.5
)offuel
remaining in the tank.
259
209
209
297
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Fuel IndicatorCruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Rev Limit Indicator
64
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
REV LIMIT INDICATOR
Table of Contents
See page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
for more information on the
security system.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
281
208
340
339
339
If equipped
Instrument Panel Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Security System IndicatorMaintenance Minder
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
65
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Si
Except Si
Table of Contents
Press and hold until the speedometer,
trip meter, and odometer readings
switch between miles per hour and
kilometers per hour. A beeper will
sound.
Gauges
Display Change Button
66
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
TRIP METER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL
GAUGE
SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
TACHOMETER
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS
U.S. model with A/T is shown.
Table of Contents
To switch the information display
between the odometer, trip meter,
outside temperature (if equipped),
and engine oil life and maintenance
item code(s), press the SEL/RESET
button repeatedly.
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles or kilometers.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial and territorial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
CONTINUED
Gauges
Odometer
Information Display
Instruments and Controls
67
U.S. model without outside temperature indicator is shown.
ODOMETER
ODOMETER
TRIP METER A
TRIP METER B
ENGINE OIL LIFE
TRIP METER A
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
TRIP METER B
: Press the SEL/
RESET button.
: Press the SEL/
RESET button.
Table of Contents
±±
−
−−−−
−−−
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
There are two trip meters: TRIP A
and TRIP B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SEL/
RESET button repeatedly.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
This meter shows the number of
miles or kilometers driven since you
last reset it.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Celsius (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
SEL/RESET button until the
temperature is shown on the
information display.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer or
cooler.
The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
Select the outside temperature
display, then press and hold the
SEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.
The following sequence will appear
for1secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5,
4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,
3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
When it reaches the desired value,
release the SEL/RESET button. You
should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
If equipped
Gauges
Trip Meter Outside Temperature Indicator
68
NOTE:
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the SEL/RESET
button. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
340
281
Gauges
Check Fuel Cap Message Maintenance Minder
Instruments and Controls
69
Table of Contents
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should rise to
about the middle of the gauge. In
severe driving conditions, such as
very hot weather or a long period of
uphill driving, the reading may rise
intotheupperhalfofthegauge.Ifit
reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull
safely to the side of the road. See
page for instructions and
precautions on checking the engine
cooling system.
337
Gauges
Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge
70
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped
1:
2:
3:
4:
Si model
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
71
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
HORN
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
HEATED MIRRORS
DISPLAY CHANGE
BUTTON
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
SEL/RESET BUTTON
(P.75)
(P.66)
(P.66)
(P.76)
(P.76)
(P.30)
(P.72)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.73)
FOG LIGHTS (P.74)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.77)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) OFF SWITCH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
CONTROL BUTTONS
(P.269)
(P.204)
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.212)
(P.240)
(P.209)
(P.104)
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
4
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers are not activated.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
While the vehicle is stopped and in
gear, the wipers sweep the
windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
The wipers operate every
few seconds. At low speed and
high speed, the wipers run
continuously.
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to
the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to
the shortest delay
( position), the wipers
change to low speed operation
when the vehicle speed exceeds 12
mph (20 km/h).
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
andholdit.Thewashersspray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian
Sport models
OFF
MIST
LO
HI
INT
Windshield Washer
Windshield Wipers and Washers
72
ADJUSTMENT RING
EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and
Canadian Sport
:
Table of Contents
−−
−
Turn Signal
OFF
Parking and interior lights
Headlights on
High Beams
Flashhighbeams
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Push the lever
forward until you hear a click. The
high beam indicator will come on
(see page ). Pull the lever back to
return to the low beams.
Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
61
Turn Signal High Beams
Headlights On
Turn Signals and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
73
Table of Contents
With the headlight switch off or
position, the high beam
headlights come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
They will go off when the headlights
are turned off.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
On Si model
Daytime Running Lights Fog Lights
Headlights, Fog Lights
74
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
Table of Contents
＋−
The buttons under the left side vent
control the brightness of the
instrument panel. Push the or
button to adjust the brightness.
Separate adjustments can be made
when the headlights are on and off.
There are six brightness levels.
When you push either button, the
information display indicates the
current level. You will hear a tone
when you reach the maximum or
minimum brightness. The display
returns to the odometer 5 seconds
after you stop adjusting the
brightness.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to the
or position.
The center of each meter (upper and
lower) illuminates with reduced
brightness when you unlock and
open the driver’s door, and then goes
back to the selected brightness when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Instruments and Controls
75
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL BUTTONS
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
Table of Contents
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
to-side.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
Pushthebuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page .104
OnAllEX-L,CanadianSport,andSi
models
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button
76
EX-L,
Canadian
Sport,
and Si
Table of Contents
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
1.
4.
2.
3.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
77
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Table of Contents
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your set of keys.
You will need this key number if you
ever have to get a key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk and trunk release
handle locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle.
Keys and Locks
78
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
MASTER
KEY
(Black)
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
DX modelU.S. LX, LX-S, and Canadian
DX-G models
EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian Sport
models
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
The keys without a remote
transmitter do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
79
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0)
80
Table of Contents
Each door has a lock tab next to the
inside door handle. Pull the tab out
to lock the door, and push it in to
unlock the door.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab out, and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, pull and hold
the outside door handle, then pull
the lock tab out. Release the handle,
then close the door.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
On DX models
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
LOCK TAB
To lock
To unlock
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Table of Contents
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull out
the lock tab and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and pull
out the lock tab or push the top of
the master switch, then close the
door.
The lock tab on the passenger’s door
locks and unlocks only that door.
Pushing in the driver’s door lock tab
only unlocks the driver’s door.
To lock the doors, push the top of
the master door lock switch on
either front door, pull out the lock
tabonthedriver’sdoor,orusethe
keyintheoutsidelockonthedriver’s
door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
release it. If you turn it again, all
doors unlock.
With any door open and the key in
the ignition, both master door lock
switches are disabled. They are not
disabled when all the doors are
closed, or when the key is not in the
ignition.
Pushing the bottom of either master
door lock switch unlocks all doors.
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, push the lock
tab in, and use the outside door
handle.
On all models except DX
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
Power Door Locks Childproof Door Locks
82
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock
To unlock
Lock
Unlock
LEVER
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
The doors lock whenever you
move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
This is the default setting.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the
parking brake is applied. Make all
settings before you start driving. 1.
2.
On all models except DX
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
Instruments and Controls
83
Table of Contents
Locks all doors when the shift lever is
moved out of the Park (P) position (A/T
vehicles only).
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
Door Locks
To program the Park Lock mode:
84
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
Pushandholdthefrontofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
push and hold the
brake pedal, and move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.
the driver’s door
unlocks when you move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position with
the brake pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.
All doors unlock when you move
the shift lever to the Park (P)
position with the brake pedal
depressed (A/T vehicles).1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speed
reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).
On A/T vehicles,
On A/T vehicles,
On A/T vehicles,
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Auto Door Unlocking
Instruments and Controls
85
A/T models
Table of Contents
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
All doors unlock whenever you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
This is the default setting on M/T
vehicles.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
86
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the ignition switch is moved out of
the ON (II) position.
driver’s door unlock
feature.
all doors unlock feature.
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
when the shift lever is moved into the
Park (P) position with the brake pedal
depressed (A/T vehicles only).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Door Locks
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Instruments and Controls
87
A/T models
Table of Contents
Even if your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.
push and hold the
brake pedal, then move the shift
lever out of the Park (P) position.
Pushandholdtherearofthe
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
move the shift
lever to the Park (P) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
To open the trunk, pull the trunk
release handle on the left side of the
driver’s seat. To protect items in the
trunk when you need to give the key
to someone else, lock the trunk
release handle with the master key,
and give the other person the valet
key.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On A/T vehicles,
On A/T vehicles,
driver’s door unlock
feature.
all doors unlock feature.
Door Locks, Trunk
Trunk
88
MASTER KEY
TRUNK RELEASE
HANDLE
PULL
Table of Contents
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever in the direction pointed by an
arrow.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
Usethemasterkeytoopenthe
trunk lock. The valet key does not
work in this lock.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging it,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
,page .
37
51
On DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, and Canadian
DX-G models
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian
Sport models
Emergency Trunk Opener
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Trunk
Instruments and Controls
89
RELEASE LEVER
MASTER KEY
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a horn to verify that the
doors are locked. You cannot lock
the doors if any door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch.
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
any of the doors within 30 seconds,
the doors automatically relock. On
U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, EX-L, and Si
models, the security system will also
set.
If you push the LOCK button twice
within 5 seconds, you will hear a
horn to verify that the security
system has set.
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you press the button. This
button does not work when the key
is in the ignition switch.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the door activated
position) will come on when you
press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open any door, the light stays on
for about 30 seconds, then fades out.
If you relock the doors with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the light goes
off immediately.
Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 1 second to attract attention;
thehornwillsoundandtheexterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
On U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, EX-L, and Si
models
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian
Sport models
LOCK
UNLOCK
TRUNK RELEASE
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
90
LOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
U.S.LX,LX-S,and
Canadian DX-G models
EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian Sport
models
Table of Contents
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Replacing the Transmitter BatteryRemote Transmitter Care
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
91
SCREW
Table of Contents
＋
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.
3.
4.
5.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remote Transmitter
92
TAB
BATTERY
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
11 13
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
93
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
13
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints
Seats
94
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, the
center head restraint should be
adjusted up or down, to match the
passenger’s height.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Instruments and Controls
95
Rear Center PositionFront
RELEASE BUTTON
SEAT-BACK
CUSHION
LEGS RELEASE BUTTON
SEAT-BACK
CUSHION
LEG
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
Table of Contents
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Seats
Active Head Restraints
96
Table of Contents
The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The seat-back is released from inside
the trunk.
Theseat-backcanbefoldeddownas
one piece.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to one of its three positions.
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian
Sport models, the rear seat armrest
is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot
it down to use it.
CONTINUED
On DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, and Canadian
DX-G models
If equipped
Folding Rear SeatArmrest
Seats
Instruments and Controls
97
Table of Contents
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
To release the seat-back, pull the
release under the trunk panel. Push
the seat-back down, then let go of
the release.
The left and right seat-backs can be
folded separately from inside the
trunk.
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian
Sport models
Seats
98
GUIDE
CENTER SHOULDER BELT
Pull
RELEASE
Table of Contents
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not press against the front
passenger’s seat, as this could cause
the weight sensors to work
improperly.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back, and the center shoulder belt is
re-positioned in the guide whenever
the seat-back is in its upright position.
Be sure there are no twists in any
shoulder belt.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
51
249
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Seats
Instruments and Controls
99
Table of Contents
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use seat heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat is
only heated in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag cutoff
system.
On EX-L model
Seat Heaters
100
Passenger’s Seat
Driver’s Seat
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
HEATERS
Table of Contents
−
−
If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
passenger windows cannot be raised
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switchdownandholdit.Releasethe
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
Except DX and Canadian DX-G
Except DX and Canadian DX-G
Power Windows
AUTO
AUTO REVERSE
Instruments and Controls
101
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Table of Contents
If equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, briefly move the switch in
either direction.
To tilt the moonroof, push the center
of the moonroof switch straight up.
To stop the moonroof from tilting
fully open, push the moonroof switch
forward.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull or push the moonroof
switch lightly to the first detent and
hold it. The moonroof will stop when
you release the switch.
To close the moonroof fully, push
the moonroof switch forward to the
second detent, then release it. The
moonroof closes all the way. To stop
the moonroof from closing all the
way,brieflymovetheswitchin
either direction.
Moonroof
102
MOONROOF SWITCH
Tilt
Close
Open
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Table of Contents
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
operate.
If the moonroof runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
moonroof, remove the obstacle, then
use the moonroof switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Auto Reverse Mirrors
Moonroof, Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
103
TAB
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
2.
3.
4.
1.
On all models except U.S. DX On All EX-L, Canadian Sport and Si
models
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors
104
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Table of Contents
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch;ON(right),DoorActivated,
andOFF(left).IntheDoor
Activated (center) position, the light
comesonwhenyou:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors with the key or
the remote transmitter.
Remove the key from the ignition.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).59
CONTINUED
Parking Brake, Interior Lights
Ceiling LightParking Brake
Instruments and Controls
105
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
DOOR ACTIVATED
ON
OFF
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Table of Contents
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light(s) dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
If you do not open any door after you
unlock the driver’s door or remove
the key from the ignition switch, the
light(s) fades out in about 30
seconds.
If you leave any door open without
the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light(s) will go off after 3
minutes.
The front ceiling light has a two-
position switch; Door Activated and
OFF.
The front ceiling light has two
spotlights. Push the spotlight lenses
to turn them on and off.
Push on the spotlight lenses to turn
the light on and off.
On models with moonroof
On models with moonroof
OnU.S.LXandLX-Smodels
Interior Lights
Spotlights
106
OFF
SWITCHES
DOOR
ACTIVATED
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, push the instrument
panel brightness control buttons
under the driver’s side vent with the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
On Canadian Si model
Interior Convenience ItemsCourtesy Light
Interior Lights, Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
107
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
COAT HOOK
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE
HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
VANITY MIRRORCOIN BOX
If equipped:
CENTER POCKET
COURTESY LIGHT
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
To close, lower the lid, and push it
down until it latches.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
Open the front beverage holder by
sliding its cover backward.
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
This socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). It will not power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
The EX, EX-L, and Si models without
navigation system have another
accessory power socket in the center
console compartment. When more
than one socket is being used, the
combined power rating of the
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push.
If equipped
Beverage Holders Console Compartment
Accessory Power Socket
Glove Box
Interior Convenience Items
108
LEVER
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The heating and air conditioning
systems in your vehicle provide a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them. (If you have an optional
audio system, refer to the operating
instructions that came with it.)
Air conditioning is optional on DX
model.
.............
Vents, Heating, and A/C . 110
...........................Using the A/C . 112
................................Audio System . 114
Audio System (Models without
...............navigation system) . 115
......................Playing the Radio . 116
Playing the XM
Radio
..............................(Optional) . 120
............................Playing a Disc . 125
...Disc Player Error Messages . 131
.......................PlayinganiPod
. 133
.............iPod
Error Messages . 140
Playing a USB Flash Memory
....................................Device . 141
USB Flash Memory Device
....................Error Messages . 148
Audio System (Models with
...............navigation system) . 149
......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 149
............Playing the XM
Radio . 153
............................Playing a Disc . 162
...Disc Player Error Messages . 170
.....................Playing a PC Card . 171
........PC Card Error Messages . 183
.......................PlayinganiPod
. 184
.............iPod
Error Messages . 190
Playing a USB Flash Memory
....................................Device . 191
USB Flash Memory Device
....................Error Messages . 198
............AM/FM Radio Reception . 199
..................Protecting Your Discs . 201
................Remote Audio Controls . 204
......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 205
.................Radio Theft Protection . 206
..........................Setting the Clock . 207
............................Security System . 208
...............................Cruise Control . 209
........HandsFreeLink
. 212
Bluetooth
All U.S. models except DX
If equipped
Features
Features
109
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease
them.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicatorinthebuttonisonwhen
the A/C is on.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
If equipped
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Dial
Recirculation Button
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Temperature Control Dial
110
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON
(If equipped)
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
(All EX-L,
Canadian
Sport and Si
models)
Table of Contents
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select , the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C
(if equipped).
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode (see page to
use this setting). Air flows from the
center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the , A/C,
or any of the mode buttons cancels
MAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then exhausts it through
vents near the rear side panels.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
76
112
If equipped
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
MAX A/C Button
Ventilation
Features
111
Table of Contents
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Turn the fan on.
If the A/C is off, turn it on (if
equipped).
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
1.
2.
3.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
70
If equipped
If the interior is very warm,
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the Heater
Using the A/C
Dehumidify the Interior
112
Table of Contents
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . When you select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C (if equipped).
The A/C indicator will not come
on, if it was previously off.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
Select . When you select
, the system automatically
switches to fresh air mode and
turns on the A/C (if equipped).
The A/C indicator will not come
on, if it was previously off.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
5.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
To Turn Everything Off
Features
113
Table of Contents
An audio system is standard on all
models except the U.S. DX. Read the
appropriate pages (as shown below)
to use your vehicle’s audio system.
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages through .
If your vehicle has a different audio
system, refer to its manual for
operating instructions.
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages through .115 148
149 198
Audio System
114
U.S. Si model is shown. U.S. Si model is shown.
U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si models
with navigation system
EX-L,Si,U.S.LX,LX-S,EX,
Canadian DX, DX-G, and Sport models
without navigation system
Table of Contents
To change the letter, select the
previous segment by pushing the
bottom of the SEEK button.
Turn the TUNE knob to change a
letter.
Push the top of the SEEK button
to select the next segment, then
turn the TUNE knob to select a
letter. Repeat this procedure to set
your message.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop selecting a letter.
Your audio system shows a welcome
message on the display when you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
You can also customize this welcome
message to your liking with the
audio controls.
Youcansetupto16characterson
the display.
To select a character:
Make sure the audio system is off.
PushandholdtheTUNEknob,
then push the power/volume knob
on the audio control panel. You
will see the first letter blinking.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Si model only
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To Customize a Message
Features
115
TUNE KNOB
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
SEEK BUTTON
Table of Contents
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Turn the system on by
pushingthePWR/VOLknoborthe
AM/FM button. Adjust the volume
by turning the same knob.
Playing the Radio
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
116
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
ST INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
Table of Contents
−
−
−−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
SEEK button, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
Each side of the buttons
(1 through 6) can store one
frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN Preset
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
117
Table of Contents
−
To turn off auto select
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the bass (BAS),
treble (TRE), fader (FAD), balance
(BAL), and speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC) settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the SOUND
(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting to
your liking. When the level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in
the display. The system will
automatically return the display to
the selected audio mode about 5
seconds after you stop adjusting a
mode.
If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
118
Table of Contents
−
−
−
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BALANCE adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while FADER adjusts the
front-to-back strength.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
The SVC
mode controls the volume based on
vehicle speed. The faster you go, the
louder the audio volume becomes.
As you slow down, the audio volume
decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. The default setting is MID.
Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
If you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Use the TREBLE/
BASS modes to adjust the tone to
your liking.
75Balance/Fader
Audio System LightingSpeed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC)
Treble/Bass
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
119
Table of Contents
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
XM is a registered trademark of
Sirius XM Radio
,Inc.
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Radio anywhere in
the United States, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
Playing the XM
Radio
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Optional on U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si
models
120
DISPLAY BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
AUX BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP button, the display changes in
the following sequence: Channel
name, channel number, category,
artist name, and music title.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP button until
themodechanges.
Press either side of
the SEEK/SKIP button ( or
) to select another category.
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the AUX button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob. The last channel you listened
to will show in the display.
CONTINUED
Operating the XM Radio
TUNE
MODE
SEEK/SKIP
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
121
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each side of
the preset button. Each side of the
button stores one channel from the
XM1 band and one channel from the
XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Pick a preset number you want for
that channel. Press and hold the
button until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
button to tune to it.Press the AUX button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Press the AUX button again. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SCAN
Preset
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
122
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
CONTINUED
‘‘----’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
123
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II) position, push the PWR/VOL
knob to turn on the audio system and
press the AUX button. A variety of
music types and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM Radio
service, contact XM Radio at
,orat
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM
Radio. In Canada, contact XM
Canada
.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving XM Radio Service
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
124
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
Playing a Disc To Play a Disc
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
125
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD INDICATOR
DISPLAY
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
FOLDER KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display.
A disc can support more than 99
folders, and each folder can hold up
to 255 playable files. When there are
more than 99 folders on a disc, the
center display only shows two digits.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
intherestofthewaytoplayit.You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track and
the elapsed time are shown in the
display. When playing a disc in MP3
or WMA, the numbers of the current
folder and file, and the elapsed time
are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
If a file on WMA disc is protected by
digital rights management (DRM),
the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
To Load a Disc
Text Data Display Function
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
126
NOTE:
Table of Contents
−
＞
Use the SEEK/SKIP button while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
mode).
Each time you
press and release the side of
the SEEK/SKIP button, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release the
side to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
itagaintoskiptothebeginningof
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the or side of the
SEEK/SKIP button.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown. You can see up to 31
characters of the text data.
IfyoupressandholdtheDISP
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
showninthedisplay.Withadiscin
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SEEK/SKIP
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
127
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
theknobtotherighttoskiptothe
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files in
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the
repeat feature.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see
‘‘RDM’’ in the display. Press the
RDM button for 2 seconds to return
to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press and release the RDM button.
You will see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing and holding the RDM
button for 2 seconds, or by selecting
a different folder with the TUNE
knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal play.
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER-REPEAT
RANDOM (Random within a
disc)
FOLDER-RANDOM
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
128
Table of Contents
−
−
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file in each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button, selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press the
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA
mode, press the SCAN button
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last track/file
sampled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP button also turns off the scan
feature.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the CD player. Press the
AUX button to switch to an
appropriate audio unit.
In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
To Stop Playing a Disc
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
129
Table of Contents
−＋
−＋
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 4
(DISC ) or the preset 1 (DISC )
on the preset button. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 4
(DISC ), or the preset 1 (DISC )
to select the next disc in sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.
An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio. For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
201
Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
Protecting Discs
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
130
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page .
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
Error Message Cause Solution
: Except Si model
202
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 202 ). Insert the disc again. If the
code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot
be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Disc Player Error Messages
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
131
HEAT ERROR
UNSUPPORT
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Table of Contents
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
SolutionError Message Cause
Press the magazine eject button, and pull the
magazine out. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert disc.
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, check for an error message, then
insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
Insert disc magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
No disc in the disc
magazine
Mechanical Error
No disc magazine in
the disc changer
High Temperature
Optional Disc Changer Error
Messages
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
132
Table of Contents
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing an iPod
Features
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian Sport models
133
AUX BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
DISPLAY BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
iPod INDICATOR
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
Table of Contents
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod
with
the same controls used for the disc
player. To play an iPod, connect it to
the USB adapter cable in the console
compartment by using your dock
connector, then press the AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
charged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
UseonlycompatibleiPodswiththe
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
Software
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.0.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.1 or more
Model
iPod classic
iPod with video
(iPod 5th
generation)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2nd
generation
iPod nano 3rd
generation
iPod nano 4th
generation
iPod touch
iPod touch 2nd
generation
To Play an iPod
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
134
Table of Contents
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
DonotkeeptheiPodinthe
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
Pull out the USB connector from
the holder and remove the cable
from the clip in the console
compartment.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
1.
CONTINUED
Connecting an iPod
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
135
NOTE:
USB CONNECTORUSB ADAPTER
CABLE
Table of Contents
＞
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display mode switches between
the album name, the song/track
name, the artist name, or name off
(which turns off the text display).
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 17
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
2.
3.
www.apple.com/
ipod.
Text Data Display Function
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
136
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Table of Contents
−
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSEEK/
SKIP button, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press and release the side
ofthebuttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs, by using
the TUNE/SOUND knob. Push the
TUNE/SOUND knob to switch the
display to an iPod menu, then turn
the TUNE/SOUND knob to select a
desired list.
After making a selection, wait for a
few seconds until the display returns
to the previous screen. The iPod
menu is set. Pressing the TUNE
knobcancelsthissettingmode
before returning to the normal
display.
Turn the TUNE knob to select an
item. After making a selection, wait
for a few seconds until the display
returns to the previous screen. The
system will then play the first file on
the selected item.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the
artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SEEK/SKIP button.
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Files To Select a File f rom iPod Menu
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
SKIP
Features
137
Press the TUNE/
SOUND knob.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle modes by using the RPT and
RDM buttons.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press the RPT
button again.
This feature
plays all available files in a selected
list (playlists, artists, albums or
songs) in random order. To activate
theshuffleallfeature,pressthe
RDM button. You will see ‘‘RDM’’ in
thedisplay.Toturnitoff,pressand
hold the RDM button.
This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums
or songs) in random order. The files
in each album are played in the
recorded order. To activate the
shuffle album feature, press the
RDM button repeatedly. You will see
‘‘F-RDM’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RDM button.
Each time you press the RDM
button, the mode changes from
shuffle all play to shuffle album play,
then to normal play.
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Shuff le Mode:
REPEAT
SHUFFLE ALL
SHUFFLE ALBUM
138
NOTE:
Table of Contents
＊
＊
To play the radio, press the AM/FM
button. Press the CD button to
switch to the disc mode (if a disc is
loaded). Press the AUX button to
switch the audio mode between the
XM Radio (if equipped) and iPod.
If you see an error message in the
display, see page .
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the display shows ‘‘USB
NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
:
140
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Disconnecting an iPod
iPod Error MessagesTo Stop Playing Your iPod
Features
139
Table of Contents
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
SolutionCauseError Message
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some
files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. Disconnect the device.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is
connected. See page 134 for the specification
information for iPods. If it appears when a
supported iPod is connected, update the iPod
software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not
acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
USB ROM Error
Abnormal power
source
No files in iPod
Use of unsupported
device
Use of unsupported
iPod
Recognition failure of
iPod
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
iPod Error Messages
140
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
UNSUPPORTED
VER
CONNECT
RETRY
Table of Contents
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device
Features
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, and Canadian Sport models
141
AUX BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
DISPLAY BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
USB INDICATOR
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE/FOLDER KNOB
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
Table of Contents
＊
＊
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the disc player. To
play a USB flash memory device,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment, then
press the AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possibletoplaysomefiles,or
display some text data.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
:
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
142
NOTE:
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Maximum layers: 8
Partition: Top partition only
Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
Bitrate:
48 320 kbps
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Bitrate:
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
Maximum layers: 8
Partition: Top partition only
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
The order of files in USB playback
maybedifferentfromtheorderof
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
orderstoredinUSBflashmemory
device.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Features
143
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
Table of Contents
＞
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
showninthedisplay.
Pull out the USB connector from
the holder and remove the cable
from the clip in the console
compartment.
Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB connector
correctly and securely.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display mode shows you in
sequence, the folder name, the file
name, the artist tag, the album tag,
the track tag and name off (which
turns off the text display).
The display shows up to 16
characters of the selected data. If the
text data has more than 17
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.1. 2.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Text Data Display Function
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
144
USB ADAPTER
CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Table of Contents
−
−−
−
CONTINUED
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
Each time you press and
releasethe sideoftheSEEK/
SKIP button, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
file. Press and release the side
ofthebuttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current file. Press it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
andholdeitherside( or )
of the SEEK/SKIP button.
To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
theknobtotherighttoskiptothe
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button. You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RPT button.
This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the folder repeat feature,
press the RPT button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-RPT’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RPT button.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal play.
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
RPT button, RDM button, or SCAN
button.
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
SKIP
FOLDER SELECTION REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
Features
145
Table of Contents
−−−This feature plays the
files within a USB flash memory
device in random order. To active
random play, press the RDM button
twice. You will see RDM in the
display. Press and release the RDM
button to return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press and release the RDM button.
You will see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing and holding the RDM
button for 2 seconds, or by selecting
a different folder with the TUNE
knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random, to all random,
then to normal play.
This feature samples all
files in the selected folder in the
order they are stored. To activate
the scan feature, press the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file in the folder.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of the scan mode and play
the last file sampled.
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
RANDOM FOLDER-RANDOM SCAN
146
Table of Contents
−This feature
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press the SCAN button repeatedly.
You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
the first file in each folder. Press and
hold the SCAN button to get out of
the folder scan mode and play the
last file sampled.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
To play the radio, press the AM/FM
button. Press the CD button to
switch to the disc mode (if a disc is
loaded). Press the AUX button to
switch the audio mode between the
USB or XM Radio (if equipped).
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the display shows ‘‘USB NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
If you see an error message in the
display, see page .
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
148
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
FOLDER SCAN To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Features
147
Table of Contents
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
SolutionError Message Cause
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection
feature of the system stops supplying power to
USB because an incompatible device is
connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash
memory device are DRM or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about 3
seconds, then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is
emptyortherearenoMP3,WMA,orAACfiles
in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is
connected. See page 142 for the specification
information for the USB flash memory device.
If it appears when the supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
USB ROM Error
Abnormal power
source
Use of unsupported
files
No files in USB flash
memory device
Use of unsupported
USB flash memory
device
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
148
USB ERROR
BAD USB
DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
UNPLAYABLE
FILE
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
Table of Contents
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Playing the AM/FM RadioVoice Control System
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
149
TUNE BAR
BACKGROUND
ICON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SOUND ICON
AUTO SELECT
ICON
U.S. Si model is shown.
FM1 ICON
FM2 ICON
AM ICON
Table of Contents
−
▲▼
▲
▼
＊
＊
＊
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower half of the screen.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or
XM2 ). On the FM band, STEREO
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
If equipped
For information on XM Radio, see
page .
:
153
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
150
Table of Contents
−
−
▲▼
−
Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
andplayitfor10seconds.Whenit
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the or side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Preset
SEEK
SCAN
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
151
Table of Contents
−If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then touch the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
press the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
.199
To turn off auto select,
AUTO SELECT
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
152
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Playing the XM Radio
Features
153
TUNE BAR
XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
SCAN BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
JOYSTICK
CHANNEL
INDICATOR
U.S. Si model is shown.
XM RADIO
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
Table of Contents
−
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the XM
RADIO button. Adjust the volume by
turning the knob. The last channel
you listened to will show in the
display.
You can also change to the XM
Radio while you are listening to an
FM station, AM station, disc, PC
card, etc., by touching the XM1 or
XM2iconontheaudiodisplay.
You can also operate the radio using
the control buttons on the left side of
the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower part of the
screen.Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Radio anywhere in
the United States, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM is a registered trademark of
Sirius XM Radio
,Inc.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
Whenyoupressandholdthe
AUDIO button, the display also
shows all XM information.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon. In channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels. In category mode,
such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
you can select all of the channels
within that category. Each time you
touch and release the MODE icon,
the display changes between the
channel mode and the category
mode.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
154
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
▲
▼
CONTINUED
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using each preset
button or preset icons on the screen.
Each preset button or icon stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
Press the XM RADIO button.
Either XM1 or XM2 will show in
the display.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.
Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
for higher numbered channels
and for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button or
touch the SCAN icon on the screen.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar
( or ) until you hear a beep
to select another category.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
1.
2.
3.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
PresetTUNE
SCAN
CATEGORY
Features
155
Table of Contents
▲▼
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
Touch the CHANNEL LIST icon to
switch the display to the channel list
which shows all channels in all
categories. Select and touch a
desired channel.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Press the XM RADIO button again
or touch the other XM icon (XM1
or XM2) on the audio display.
Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset
button’s channel is shown on the
bottom of the audio display.
You can also select a desired channel
from the list shown on the screen.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio control display on the
navigation screen.
4.
5.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Select a Channel from List
156
CHANNEL LIST ICON
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
To select a desired icon with the
joystick, move it in the appropriate
direction, then press ENT.
XM is loading the
audio or program information.
The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘----’’
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO INFO’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
157
Table of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
158
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Table of Contents
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON
(II) position, push the power/volume
knob to turn on the audio system and
press the XM RADIO button. A
variety of music types and styles will
play.
If you decide to purchase XM Radio
service, contact XM
Radio at
,orat
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact
XM
Radio. In Canada, contact XM
Canada
.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Receiving XM Radio Service
Features
159
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplay.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the side-to-
side strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.
Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
either or on the treble or
bass adjustment bar. The adjustment
bar on the lower right display shows
you the current setting.
Adjusting the Sound
BASS
BALANCE
SUBWOOFER
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation)
FADER
TREBLE
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
160
SPEAKER SETTING
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
SOUND ICON
Table of Contents
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control buttons to adjust
the illumination of the audio system
(see page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. 75
Audio System Lighting
Screen Mode
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
161
Table of Contents
−
＋
Playing a Disc
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
162
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
CD ICON
U.S. Si model is shown.
REWIND BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
load or play discs, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
This audio system can also play CD-
RsandCD-RWscompressedinMP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 99 folders and play up to
999 tracks. If the disc has a complex
structure, it takes a while to read the
disc before the system begins to play
it.
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsSampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
If a file on WMA disc is protected by
digital rights management (DRM),
the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,
andthenskipstothenextfile.
CONTINUED
To Play a Disc
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
163
NOTE:
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Table of Contents
The disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc player appears.
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded down screen as a tray.
If you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
To Load a Disc
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
164
OPEN BUTTON
DISC SLOT
CLOSE BUTTON
Table of Contents
−
−
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the disc player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
lower portion of the screen.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press ENT
on the top of the joystick to select
the icon.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.
To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or (preset 3).
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
SKIP
FF/REW
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
165
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
U.S. Si model is shown.
Table of Contents
−
▲
▼
−
−
−
−To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder.Pressitagaintoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press and
hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to
turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, replays all files in
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
FOLDER REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM button or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE bar also turns
off folder repeat.
This
featureplaysthetrackswithinadisc
(the files within a folder) in random
order. To activate track random,
press and release the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press and
hold the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.
This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in each folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed. To activate folder
random, press the RDM button
(preset 2) twice. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM in the display.
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing the RDM button again, or if
you select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.
In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/folder)
FOLDER RANDOM
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
166
Table of Contents
−
−
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press and hold the SCAN
button for 2 seconds to get out of
scan mode and play the last track/
file sampled.
This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
and hold the SCAN button. You will
see FOLDER SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal play.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
CONTINUED
Using a Track List
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)
FOLDER SCAN
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
167
FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
Table of Contents
▲▼
＊
＊
＊
To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page ). Press
the disc eject button ( ) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
on the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or
XM2 icon.IfaPCcardisinthe
audio unit, touch the CARD icon to
play the PC card. Press the CD
button again or touch the CD icon to
switch back to the disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
If equipped:
164
Removing a Disc
To Stop Playing a Disc
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
168
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use either side of the
TUNE bar. To select the previous
disc, press the side. To select the
next disc, press the side.
201
Operating the Optional Disc
Changer
Protecting Discs
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
169
Table of Contents
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
If there is still a problem, the error
message will appear again. Press the
eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Error Message Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
TOC Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information, see page 202.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information, see page 202.
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information, see page 202.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Disc Player Error Messages
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
170
Table of Contents
＋
−
Playing a PC Card
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
171
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
U.S. Si model is shown.
REWIND BUTTON
TRACK LIST ICON
PC CARD ICON
PLAY MODE ICON
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the disc player. To load or play a
card, the ignition switch must be in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 99 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.
Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
SD memory card
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
To Play a PC Card
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
172
NOTE:
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Compatible with variable bitrate
and multi-session
Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.
The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.
Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Bitrate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
CONTINUED
Loading a PC Card
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
173
PC CARD SLOT
Table of Contents
Therearethreeplaymodes:Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
If play mode information was not
includedinthetrackswhenthey
were added to the card, it will not be
displayed on the screen.
Foldermodeplaystracksinthe
order they were added to the card.
Artistmodeplaystracksin
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.
To Select a Play Mode
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
174
FOLDER MODE
MODE INDICATOR
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON
PLAY MODE ICON
MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR
ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
Table of Contents
To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press ENT.
After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
175
PLAY MODE ICON
Table of Contents
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the files in order to the new list.
To go back to the previous screen,
presstheCANCELbuttononthe
rightsideofthescreen.Toexitthe
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shownonthebottomofthescreen.
Iconsonthescreencanalsobe
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press ENT on the top of the joystick
to select the icon.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
176
PRESET BUTTONS
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
U.S. Si model is shown.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
▲
▼
−
−
−
−
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the side of the TUNE bar to skip
the next folder, and press the side
to move to the beginning of the
current folder. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
To continuously replay
a file, press and release the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature, when
activated, replays all the files in the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
andholdtheRPTbuttonfor2
seconds again to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM button, or selecting a
different folder/artist/album with
the TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate track
random, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press and hold the RDM button for 2
seconds to return to normal play.
This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, press the RDM button
(preset 2) 2 times. You will see
FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST
RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in
the display.
CONTINUED
SKIP
FF/REW
FOLDER SELECTION
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder)
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
177
Table of Contents
−
−
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again, or
you select a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
The scan function samples
all files on the PC card in the order
they are recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each file on the PC card.
Press and hold the SCAN button for
2 seconds to get out of scan mode
and play the last file sampled.
This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep. You will
see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
SCAN
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
178
Table of Contents
▲▼
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.
CONTINUED
Using a Track List
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
179
RETURN ICON
FOLDER ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
ARTIST NAME
Table of Contents
In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.
When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.
You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.
Song Search Function
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
180
ARTIST ICON
TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
RETURN ICON
SONG SEARCH ICON
ALBUM ICON
Folder mode is shown.
ALBUM NAME
Table of Contents
▲▼
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Touch the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCELbuttononthescreen,the
display returns to the mode menu
without doing a search.
To cancel the selected letter, select
the letter and touch the Delete icon.
To select more characters, touch the
More icon. The other character list
will be shown.
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the or
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing ENT.
Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
CONTINUED
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
181
MORE ICON
DELETE ICON
LIST ICON
FILE LIST
ARTIST LIST
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Searching for a Song by Album Name
Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.
To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
). Press the eject button ( )
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , or
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio
unit, press the CD button or touch
theCDicontoplaythedisc.Touch
the CARD icon to switch back to the
PC card player.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
If equipped:
164
To Stop Playing a PC Card
PC Card Player Malf unction
Removing a PC Card
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
182
ALBUM LIST
Table of Contents
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a PC card, find
thesolutioninthecharttotheright.
If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is a
possibility that the files have been damaged.
It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files in
the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.
It appears when an unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supports
CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.
PC Card Error Messages
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
183
FILE ERROR
NO MUSIC
MEDIA ERROR
Table of Contents
−
＋
Playing an iPod
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
184
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
USB ICONiPod INDICATOR
SKIP BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON
FAST FORWARD BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
Table of Contents
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod
with
the same controls used for the in-
dash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the console compartment by using
your dock connector. Press the
AUDIO button beside the screen to
show the audio display and touch the
AUX icon. The ignition switch must
be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
recharged with the ignition switch in
these positions.
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
theplaymodefunctions.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
DonotkeeptheiPodinthe
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage it.
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
UseonlycompatibleiPodswiththe
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
CONTINUED
Software
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.0 or more
Ver. 1.0.2 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.1 or more
Model
iPod classic
iPod with video
(iPod 5th
generation)
iPod nano
iPod nano 2nd
generation
iPod nano 3rd
generation
iPod nano 4th
generation
iPod touch
iPod touch 2nd
generation
To Play an iPod
Voice Control System
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
185
NOTE:
Table of Contents
−
−
Pull out the USB connector from
the holder and remove the cable
from the clip in the console
compartment.
Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed on the screen. It also
shows the artist, album and track
(file) names on the screen.
Use the SKIP button while an iPod is
playing to change files.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
1.
2.
3.
www.apple.com/
ipod.
Connecting an iPod
To Change or Select Files
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
SKIP
FF/REW
186
DOCK CONNECTOR
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums and songs. Press the
AUDIO button to display the screen,
then touch the iPod MENU icon.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press ENT.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either the
artists or albums list, all available
files on the selected list are played.
PresstheAUDIObuttontogoback
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio control display on the screen.
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To Select a File from iPod Menu
Features
187
Table of Contents
▲▼
−
−
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. The current folder is
highlighted in blue.
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode by using the RPT
button or RDM button.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the repeat feature, press the RPT
button (Preset 1). You will see
‘‘REPEAT’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press the RPT button (Preset 1)
again.
This feature
plays all available files from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. To activate the
track random feature, press the
RDM button (Preset 2). You will see
‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press the RDM button
(Preset 2).
Using a Track List To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
188
TRACK LIST ICON
RETURN ICON
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
This feature
plays all available albums from the
selected items in the iPod menu list
(playlists, artists, albums or songs)
in random order. The files in each
album are played in the recorded
order. To activate the album random
feature, press and hold the RDM
button (Preset 2). You will see
‘‘ALBUM RANDOM’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press and hold the
RDM button (Preset 2).
You can also select another list from
theiPodmenuwhilekeepingthe
random function.
To play the radio, press the AM/FM
button or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CD
icon to switch to the disc mode (if a
disc is loaded). Each time you press
the CD button, the audio mode
switches between iPod, disc and
XM
Radio .
If a PC card is in the audio unit,
touch the CARD icon to play the PC
card.
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the navigation screen
shows ‘‘NO DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
If you see an error message in the
screen, see page .
If equipped
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
:
:
190
ALBUM RANDOM To Stop Playing Your iPod
iPod
Error Messages
Disconnecting an iPod
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
189
NOTE:
Table of Contents
Error Message
If you see an error message on the
screen while playing an iPod, find
thesolutioninthecharttotheright.
If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
There is no music information.
iPod Error Messages
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
190
UNSUPPORTED
NO SONG
Table of Contents
−
＋
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
191
SCAN BUTTON
JOYSTICK
AUDIO BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
USB ICON
TUNE FOLDER BAR
WMA/MP3 INDICATOR
SKIP BUTTONREWIND BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
FAST FORWARD BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
Table of Contents
＊
＊
This audio system can select and
play the audio files from a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play a USB flash memory
device, connect it to the USB adapter
cable in the console compartment.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Press the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
touch the AUX icon.
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC formats. Depending on the
format, the display shows MP3,
WMA or AAC when a USB flash
memory device is playing. The USB
flash memory device limit is up to
700 folders or up to 65535 files.
Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possibletoplaysomefiles,or
display some text data.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lock-
out features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
:To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
192
NOTE:
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The specifications for compatible
AAC files are:
Bitrate:
48 320 kbps
Supported standards:
MPEG4/AAC LC
MPEG2/AAC LC
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
Bitrate:
48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
Bitrate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps
(MPEG1)
Supported standards:
MPEG1 Audio Layer3
MPEG2 Audio Layer3
Partition: Top partition only
Maximum layers: 8
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
The order of files in USB playback
maybedifferentfromtheorderof
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
orderstoredinUSBflashmemory
device.
You can select the AUX mode by
using the navigation system voice
control buttons, but cannot operate
theplaymodefunctions.
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)
Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
Supported standards:
WMA version 7/8/9
Sampling frequency:
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/
44.1/48 kHz
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System
Features
193
Table of Contents
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB connector
correctly and securely.
Pull out the USB connector from
the holder and remove the cable
from the clip in the console
compartment.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
When the USB flash memory device
is connected and the USB mode is
selected on the audio system, the
WMAorMP3indicatorisshownon
the navigation screen. It also shows
the folder and file numbers, and the
elapsed time on the screen.
1. 2.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
194
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
Table of Contents
▲▼
−
−
−
▼
▲
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
To scroll through the display, touch
the or icononthesideofthe
screen.Togobacktotheprevious
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. The current folder is
highlighted in blue.
Each time you press and
release (preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold (preset 4)
or (preset 3).
To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar. Press the
side to skip to the next folder,
andpressthe sidetoskiptothe
beginning of the previous folder.
Use the SKIP button while a USB
flash memory device is playing to
change files.
CONTINUED
Using a Track ListTo Change or Select Files
SKIP
FF/REW
FOLDER SELECTION
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
195
FOLDER ICON
RETURN ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
RPT button, RDM button, or SCAN
button.
This feature
continuously plays a file. To activate
the track repeat feature, press the
RPT button (Preset 1). You will see
‘‘TRACK REPEAT’’ in the display.
To turn it off, press the RPT button
(Preset 1).
This feature
replays all the files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the folder repeat feature,
press and hold the RPT button
(Preset 1). You will see ‘‘FOLDER
REPEAT’’ in the display. To turn it
off, press and hold the RPT button
(Preset 1).
This feature
plays all the files in random order.
To activate the track random feature,
press the RDM button (Preset 2).
You will see ‘‘TRACK RANDOM’’ in
thedisplay.Toturnitoff,pressthe
RDM button (Preset 2).
This
feature plays the files in the selected
folder in random order. To activate
the folder random feature, press and
hold the RDM button (Preset 2). You
will see ‘‘FOLDER RANDOM’’ in the
display. To turn it off, press and hold
the RDM button (Preset 2).
This feature
samples all files in the selected
folder in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan feature, press
the SCAN button. You will see
‘‘TRACK SCAN’’ in the display. You
will also see the file number blinking.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file in the folder. Press the
SCAN button to get out of the scan
mode. The system plays the last file
sampled.
This feature
samples the first file in each folder in
the order they are stored. To
activate the folder scan feature,
press and hold the SCAN button.
You will see ‘‘FOLDER SCAN’’ in the
display. You will also see the folder
number blinking. You will get a 10
second sampling of the first file in
each folder. Press the SCAN button
to get out of the scan mode. The
system plays the last file sampled.
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
TRACK REPEAT
FOLDER REPEAT
TRACK RANDOM
FOLDER RANDOM
TRACK SCAN
FOLDER SCAN
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
196
Table of Contents
＊＊
＊
＊
To play the radio, press the AM/FM
button or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,
XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CD
icon to switch to the disc mode (if a
disc is loaded). Each time you press
the CD button, the audio mode
switches between the USB, disc and
XM
Radio .
If a PC card is in the audio unit,
touch the CARD icon to play the PC
card.
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the navigation screen shows ‘‘NO
DATA.’’
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
If equipped
If you see an error message in the
screen, see page .
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
:
198
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Features
197
Table of Contents
If you see an error message on the
screen while playing a USB flash
memory device, find the solution in
the chart to the right. If you cannot
clear the error message, take your
vehicle to your dealer.
SolutionError Message
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash
memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been
damaged.
Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
There is no music information.
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
198
UNPLAYABLE FILE
UNSUPPORTED
NO SONG
Table of Contents
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
199
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
200
Table of Contents
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from finger prints, liquids, and felt-
tip pens, can cause the disc to not
play properly, or possibly jam in the
drive.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
201
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Table of Contents
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Damaged discs Poor quality discs
The disc player/changer has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated below, it may
become stuck inside and damage the
audio unit.
1.
2. 3.
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
Protecting Your Discs
202
Warped
Burrs
Chipped/
Cracked
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic
Ring
Table of Contents
Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
4. 5.
Protecting Your Discs
Features
203
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape
Arrow ShapeCan Shape
Table of Contents
＋−
＋
−
▲▼
＋
−
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
To activate the seek function, press
and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )
of the CH button until you hear a
beep. The system searches up or
down from the current frequency to
find a station with a strong signal.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top ( ) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
( ) to return to the beginning of the
current track or file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track or file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode.
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all
possible media sources whether they
are present or not.
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all present,
connected media sources. Media
sources that are not present or
connected will not appear when
cycling with the MODE button.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press and release the
top ( ) of the button, the system
goes to the next preset station on the
band you are listening to. Press and
releasethebottom( )togobackto
the previous station.
If equipped
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
Remote Audio Controls
204
CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top ( ) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous file.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top ( ) of the
CH button until you hear a beep to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
IfyouareplayingaUSBflash
memory device or iPod with the USB
adapter cable (if equipped), press
and release the top ( ) of the CH
button to skip forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press the
bottom( )toskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current file. Press it
twice to return to the previous file.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket on the front panel. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories
using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
On models with audio system
Auxiliary Input Jack
Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
205
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons (icons on
vehicles with navigation system) to
enter the code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific 5 digit code using the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
On models with audio system
Radio Theft Protection
206
Table of Contents
On models with navigation system
On models without navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
Change the hours by pressing the H
(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
To set the time, press the CLOCK
(AM/FM) button until the displayed
time begins to blink, then release the
button.
Press the CLOCK (AM/FM) button
again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
CLOCK (AM/FM) button until you
hear a beep, then pressing the R
(preset 3) button sets the clock back
to the previous hour. If the displayed
time is after the half hour, the clock
sets forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
Setting the Clock
Features
207
CLOCK BUTTON
U.S. Si model is shown.
RESET BUTTON
MINUTE BUTTON
HOUR BUTTON
Table of Contents
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
driver’s lock tab, door lock master
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator on the
instrument panel starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the master key
or the remote transmitter without
triggering the alarm. The alarm will
sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
the trunk is opened with the trunk
release handle.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the door and trunk open
indicators on the instrument panel
(see page ) to see if the doors and
trunk are fully closed. Since it is not
part of the monitor display, manually
check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights (low beam), parking
lights, side marker lights, and
taillights flash if someone attempts
to break into your vehicle or remove
the radio. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then it stops. To reset an
activated system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), the
hood, or the trunk will cause the
alarm to activate. It will also activate
if the audio unit is removed from the
dashboard or the wiring is cut.
61
If equipped
Security System
208
NOTE:
Except Si
Si
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Table of Contents
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
1.
2.
3.
If equipped
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
209
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal causes the cruise
control to cancel.To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel goes out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
210
NOTE:
Table of Contents
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the previously
set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h), and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Features
211
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
Table of Contents
−
−
Bluetooth
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
On models with navigation system
HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
Press and
release to give a command or answer
a call.
Press and
release to end a call, go back to the
previous command, or cancel the
command.
Airorwindnoisefromthe
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Using HFL
HFL Talk button
HFL Back button
HFL Buttons
Voice Control Tips
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
212
HFL BACK BUTTON
NAVI VOICE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HFL TALK
BUTTON
MICROPHONE
Table of Contents
Press and release the HFL Talk
button each time you want to
make a command. After the beep,
speak in a clear, natural tone.
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Many commands can be spoken
together. For example, you can
say ‘‘Call 123-456-7890’’ or ‘‘Dial
Peter.’’
When HFL is in use, navigation
voice commands cannot be
recognized.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
To hear general HFL information,
including help on pairing a phone
or setting up the system, say
‘‘Tutorial.’’
For help at any time, including a
list of available commands, say
‘‘Hands free help.’’
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Help Features
Features
213
Table of Contents
A notification that there is an
incoming call, or HFL is in use, will
appear on the navigation screen
when the audio system is on.
Onthemapscreen,youwillseea
‘‘HFL’’ message on the screen.
‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed on
the audio display when a phone is
linked.
However, when the current street is
shown, and AUDIO INFO icon is
visible, ‘‘HFL’’ will not appear when
there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Information Display
214
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
HFL MESSAGE
Table of Contents
＃＃＃＃
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
How to Use HFL
Features
215
‘‘Phone Setup’’
‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’
‘‘Pair’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Jim Smith’’
‘‘Set Pairing
Code’’
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
‘‘List’’
‘‘Status’’
‘‘Next Phone’’
‘‘123-555- ’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
Pair a phone to the system (See page 218)
Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 219)
Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 219)
Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 219)
Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system
(See page 220)
Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 220)
Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number
(See page 220)
Enter desired phone number (See page 221)
Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.
(See page 221)
Table of Contents
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
216
‘‘Redial’’
‘‘Transfer’’
‘‘Mute’’
‘‘Send’’
‘‘Phonebook’’
‘‘Store’’
‘‘Edit’’
‘‘Delete’’
‘‘Receive
Contact’’
‘‘List’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
Redial the last number called (See page 222)
Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 224)
Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 225)
Send numbers or names during a call (See page 225)
Store a phonebook entry (See page 226)
Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 226)
Delete a phonebook entry (See page 227)
If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts from
your phone to HFL (See page 227)
Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 227)
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
217
‘‘Change Language’’
‘‘Hands Free Help’’
‘‘System
Set up’’
‘‘Tutorial’’
‘‘Clear’’
‘‘Auto Transfer’’
‘‘Call Notification’’
‘‘Security’’
‘‘Change Passcode’’
Press HFL
Talk button
Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.
: Canadian models
Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key
cycle to access the system (See page 232)
Change your security passcode (See page 233)
Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call
(See page 233)
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle (See page 233)
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and security
passcode (See page 234)
Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 213)
Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command
(See page 213)
Change language from English to French (See page 234)
Table of Contents
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
This command group is available for
paired cell phones.
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Your phone must be in discovery
or search mode to pair. Refer to
your phone’s manual.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
If after three minutes your phone
is not ready to pair or a phone is
not found, the system will time out
andreturntoidle.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button. If you are pairing a phone
for the first time, HFL will give
you information about the pairing
process. If it is not the first phone
you are pairing, say ‘‘
’’ and say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and put
your phone in discovery or search
mode. HFL will give you a 4-digit
pairing code and begin searching
foryourphone.
When your phone finds a
Bluetooth device, select HFL from
the options and enter the 4-digit
code from the previous step.
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the newly paired phone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phone Setup
Phone
setup Pair
Phone pairing tips
To pair a cell phone:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
218
Table of Contents
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
If there is more than one phone
paired to the system, HFL will ask
you which phone’s name you want
to change. Follow the HFL
prompts and rename the phone.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will ask you which phone you
want to delete. Follow the HFL
prompts to continue with the
deletion.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
HFL will read out all the paired
phone’s names.
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3. 3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Phone setup
Edit
Phone setup
Delete
List
Phone setup
To hear the names of all paired
phones:
To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
219
Table of Contents
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL will tell you which phone is
linked to the system.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
HFL disconnects the linked phone
and searches for another paired
phone.
Once another phone is found, it is
linked to the system. HFL will
inform you which phone is now
linked.
If no other phones are found or
paired, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is linked again.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
If you want HFL to create a
random code each time you pair a
phone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you want
to choose your own 4-digit code to
be used each time, say ‘‘ ’’
and follow the HFL prompts.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
To hear which paired phone is
currently linked:
To change from the currently linked
phone to another paired phone:
To change the pairing code setting:
Phone setup
Status
Phone setup
Phone setup
Next phone
Set pairing code
Random
Fixed
220
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can make calls using any phone
number or a name in the HFL
phonebook. You can also redial the
last number called.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the phone number you want to dial.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Once connected, you will hear the
person you called through the audio
speakers.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the name and make the
call.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenamestoredintheHFL
phonebook that you want to call.
Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’
Bluetooth is the wireless technology
that links your phone to HFL. HFL
uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means the maximum range between
yourphoneandvehicleis30feet(10
meters).
During a call, HFL allows you to talk
up to 30 minutes after you remove
the key from the ignition switch.
However, this may weaken the
vehicle’s battery.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Making a Call
Call Dial
Call Dial
Call Dial
To make a call using a phone
number:
Tomakeacallusinganameinthe
HFL phonebook:
Features
221
Table of Contents
Select ‘‘
.’’
Press the INFO button, then select
‘‘ .’’
Select a phonebook you want to
choose a phone number from.
If the phonebook you select is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
PIN to access it. See page for
more information.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
1.
2.
3.
230
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Search Imported
Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Redial
To redial the last number called by
HFL:
To make a call from an imported
phonebook:
222
Table of Contents
Select the name. All the phone
numbers stored for that name will
be listed.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
Select the desired number to call
from the list.
Selecting ‘‘
,’’ the phone
number will be stored in HFL, so
that you can call it using HFL’s name
tag by voice.
4.
5.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
List
Store in
HandsFreeLink
Features
223
List ICON
Table of Contents
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the HFL Talk button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the HFL Talk button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HFL Back button.
You can transfer a call from HFL to
your phone, or from your phone to
HFL.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
When you receive a call, an incoming
call notification (if activated) will
play and interrupt the audio system
if it is on.
Press the HFL Talk button to answer
the call, or the HFL Back button to
hang up.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Call Waiting
Transferring a Call
Transfer
Receiving a Call
224
Table of Contents
＃
CONTINUED
Youcanstoreupto50nameswith
their associated numbers in HFL.
The numbers you store cannot only
be phone numbers but other types,
such as account numbers or
passwords, which can be sent during
a menu-driven call.
You can mute your voice to the
person you are talking to during a
call.
To mute your voice during a call,
press and release the HFL Talk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
To unmute your voice, press and
release the HFL Talk button and say
‘‘ ’’ again.
HFL allows you to send numbers or
names during a call. This is useful
when you call a menu-driven phone
system.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the name or number you want to
send.
Follow the HFL prompts to send
the tones and continue the call.
To send a pound ( ), say
‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’
1.
2.
3.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
PhonebookMuting a Call
Mute
Mute
Send Numbers or Names During
aCall
Send
To send a name or number during a
call:
Features
225
NOTE:
Table of Contents
Avoid using duplicate name
entries.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a name
entry.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
multisyllabic or longer name. For
example, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of
‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of
‘‘John.’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
thenameentryyouwanttoedit.
When asked, say the new number
for that name.
Follow the HFL prompts to
complete the edit.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say a name you want to list as your
phonebook entry.
Say the number you want to store
for the name entry.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Phonebook
Edit
Phonebook
Store
Enter
To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
226
NOTE:
Table of Contents
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Say the name you want to delete
and follow the HFL prompts to
complete the deletion.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
HFL begins reading the names in
the order they were stored.
If you hear a name you want to call,
immediatelypresstheHFLTalk
button and say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts, select a
number from your cell phone, and
send it to HFL.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts and
name the number, or say
‘‘ ’’ if it is not the number
you want to store.
Follow the HFL prompts if you
want to store another number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
Phonebook
Delete
Phonebook
List
Call
Receive contact
Phonebook
Discard
To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone number
from your cell phone directly to the
HFL phonebook (available on some
phones):
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
227
Table of Contents
(available on some phones)
handsfreelink.honda.
com
www.honda.ca,
The entire phonebook data of the
cell phone that is linked to HFL can
be imported to the navigation system.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and HFL will begin
importing the phonebook. Select
‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.
Once a phonebook has been
imported, you can search the phone
numbers by the person’s name.
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
Select a phonebook from the list.
If you select
from the Information screen menu,
you will see four HFL options.
For a list of cell phones that are
compatible with this feature:
In the U.S., visit
or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit or call
(888) 9-HONDA-9.
Import Cellular
Phonebook
OK
Search Imported
Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Cellular Phonebook
Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
228
IMPORTED PHONEBOOK
IMPORTED DATE
PIN ICON
Table of Contents
Select a person from the list. Up to
three category icons are displayed in
the left side of the list:
Select the person’s number you want
to call, and press the HFL Talk
button.
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
If the phonebook is PIN-protected,
you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.
To search for a specific name in the
phonebook, enter the keyword for
either the first or last name.
To display all names in the
phonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.
CONTINUED
List
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
229
Preference
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
List ICON
Table of Contents
Select ‘‘
,’’ and a list of imported
phonebooks will be displayed.
After making a selection, the
following screen will appear.
Select‘‘ ,’’then‘‘ ’’tocomplete
the deletion.
You can add, change, or remove a
PIN number from any phonebook.
You can delete any imported
phonebook.
Select a phonebook you want to
delete. If the phonebook is PIN-
protected, you will need to enter the
4-digit PIN number.
If you have selected a phonebook
without a PIN, you will see the above
display.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You will
have to re-enter the PIN for
confirmation.
Delete Imported
Phonebook
Yes OK
PIN Number
Delete Imported Phonebook:
To add a PIN:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
230
Table of Contents
Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select
‘‘ ’’ after you enter
the current PIN.
Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
You will be asked to re-enter the PIN
for verification.
The display will change as shown
above.
Select the phonebook you want. The
display will change as shown above.
Enter the current PIN for this
phonebook.
To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:
PIN number
Do not use PIN
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
231
Table of Contents
This command group allows you to
change or customize HFL basic
settings.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Once a passcode is set, you
will need to enter it to use HFL each
time you start the vehicle. If you
forget the code, your dealer will have
toresetitforyou,oryouwillhaveto
clear the entire system (see page
).
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the 4-digit passcode you want to
set.
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
1.
2.
3.
4.
234
System Setup
System setup
Security
To set a 4-digit passcode to lock the
HFL system f or security purposes:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
232
NOTE:
Table of Contents
＊
＊
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts to
confirm the number.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
the new 4-digit passcode.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
The default setting is a ring tone.
Follow the HFL prompts and say
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ You
can also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audible
incoming call notification.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
HFL will let you know if auto
transfer is on or off, depending on
the previous setting. Follow the
HFL prompts to change the
setting.
Say ‘‘ ’’ after the
prompts.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3. 1.
:
CONTINUED
System setup
System setup
System setupChange passcode
Ring tone Prompt
Off
Call notification
Auto transfer
To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or a
prompt as the incoming call
notification :
To activate or deactivate the auto
transfer function:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Features
233
Table of Contents
This operation clears the passcodes,
paired phones, all names in the HFL
phonebook, and all imported
phonebook data.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Say‘‘ ’’aftertheprompts.
Follow the HFL prompts to
continue to complete the clearing
procedure.
You can also clear the system when
you have forgotten the passcode and
cannot access HFL. When HFL asks
you for the passcode, say ‘‘
.’’ Paired phones, all names in
the HFL phonebook and all imported
phonebook data will be lost.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Follow the HFL prompts.
Say the language you want to
change to in that language.
Press and release the HFL Talk
button before a command.
Say ‘‘ .’’
Follow the HFL prompts to
change the language to English or
French.
If you have not named your paired
phone in the language you just
selected, HFL will ask you to name it
in the current language.
When French is your currently
selected language, you can give voice
commands in French.
1.
2.
3.
2.
1.
2.
1.
Canadian models only Canadian models only
System setup
Clear
System
clear
Quick Language Selection Change Language
Change language
To clear the system:
To quickly change the language: To change the system language
between English and French:
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
234
Table of Contents
The name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
Bluetooth
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth
Wireless Technology
Features
235
Table of Contents
236
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................
Break-in Period . 238
.................Fuel Recommendation . 238
.........Service Station Procedures . 239
....................................Refueling . 239
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 240
...................................Oil Check . 241
.............Engine Coolant Check . 243
...............................Fuel Economy . 244
...Accessories and Modifications . 247
.............................Carrying Cargo . 249
Before Driving
Before Driving
237
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 91 or higher.
Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance. Use
of a gasoline with a pump octane
number less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Do not tow a trailer.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10% ethanol by
volume and up to 15% MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
All models except Si
Si model only
238
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Open the fuel fill door by pushing
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
You may hear a knocking noise from
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to
a lower gear.
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does
not contain MMT, visit Owner
Link at . In
Canada, visit for
additional information on gasoline.
1.
2.
owners.honda.com
www.honda.ca
Refueling
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
239
Push
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Table of Contents
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard. The
hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank equalizes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
1.
5.
6.
4.
3.
340
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
240
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Table of Contents
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip, and insert the
end into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly
to remove the support rod from
the hole. Put the support rod back
into its holding clip. Lower the
hood to about a foot (30 cm) above
the fender, then let it drop. Make
sure it is securely latched.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Insert it all the way back in its tube.
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3.
1.
2.
3.2.
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Before Driving
241
DIPSTICK
SUPPORT ROD
LATCH
GRIP
Except Si
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
4.
290
Service Station Procedures
Adding Engine Oil
242
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
Si
Except Si Si
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Table of Contents
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
286
294
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Engine Coolant Check
Service Station Procedure
Before Driving
243
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
Except Si
Si
RESERVE TANK
RESERVE TANK
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shownintheexampletotheright
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
achieved is also provided.
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
pergallon(basedonEPAfuelcost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
(Canada: Visit
)
www.
fueleconomy.gov www.
vehicles.gc.ca
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
City MPG
Combined Fuel Economy
Highway MPG
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost
244
Combined Fuel
Economy
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
City MPG Highway MPG
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
aremoreefficientwhenwarmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the
information display (see
on page ).
For example:
Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
286
CONTINUED
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certif ication Seal (see page
).
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Drive moderately
Observe the speed limit
Always drive in the highest gear
possible
Avoid excessive idling
Maintain proper tire inflation
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle
Keep your vehicle clean
290
Vehicle Maintenance
Drive Eff iciently
Before Driving
245
Table of Contents
−
−
Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
Reset trip counter to zero.
Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
Follow one of the simple calculations above.
The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1)
2)
3)
4)
Fuel Economy
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system
Plan and combine trips
Calculating Fuel Economy
246
Miles per
Gallon
100
Kilometers
Gallons
of fuel
Miles
driven
Liter
Lper
100 km
Table of Contents
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle, or improve its performance.
These accessories have been
designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system (if
equipped).
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
theseareasmayinterferewith
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
342
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
247
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) .
: If equipped
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
248
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Console compartment
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket
Door and seat-back pockets
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
If equipped:
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
249
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
TRUNK
DOOR POCKETS
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
SEAT-BACK POCKET
:
If equipped
Table of Contents
−
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models
and 395 kg for Canadian models.
Label Example
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
(3)
(2)
(1)
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
250
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Table of Contents
−×
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
(4)
(5)
(6)
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
251
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Do not put any items on top of the
trunk panel. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
51
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo
252
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA
) system, the
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), and facts you need if you
are planning to tow a trailer.
........................
Driving Guidelines . 254
........................Preparing to Drive . 255
.......................Starting the Engine . 256
...................Manual Transmission . 257
..............Automatic Transmission . 260
...........................................Parking . 264
.............................Braking System . 265
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 266
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA
),
aka Electronic Stability
........Control (ESC), System . 268
Tire Pressure Monitoring
........................System (TPMS) . 270
...........................Towing a Trailer . 273
Driving
Driving
253
Because of the low-profile tires
fitted to your vehicle, the alloy
wheels are closer to the ground.
Driving over a pothole or road
debris at too high a speed can
seriously damage a wheel. Slow
down under these conditions.
Curbs and steep inclines could
damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
Use caution if you ever drive your
vehicleonveryroughorrutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can
also cause damage.
Your vehicle is designed to give you
optimum handling and performance
on well-maintained roads. As part of
this design, your vehicle has a
minimum of ground clearance and
very low-profile tires.
Driving Guidelines
Si model
254
Table de matières
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
1.
2.
3.
4. 9.
8.
7.
6.
5. 10.
14
57
93
77
314
103
Preparing to Drive
Driving
255
Table de matières
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Press the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Starting the Engine
256
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page .
79
Table de matières
CONTINUED
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
from any forward gear to reverse
while the vehicle is moving at a
certain speed (see page ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
259
The engine can be damaged if
you inadvertently downshift into the
wrong gear (for example, going from
third gear at high rpms to second gear
instead of upshifting to fourth gear; the
engine speed limiter will not work in this
situation).
On models with manual transmission
Manual Transmission
Driving
257
NOTE:
Except Si Si
Table de matières
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long
time on a hot day, be careful before
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (44 km/h)
39 mph (63 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)
Normal acceleration
17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (46 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)
With 5-speed manual transmission
With 6-speed manual transmission
On Si model
Recommended Shift Points
Manual Transmission
258
Rapid slowing or speeding up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Table de matières
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Your vehicle has a rev limit indicator
to show you when the engine speed
is near the tachometer’s red zone
(see page ).
If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
The manual transmission has a
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from any forward gear to
reverse while the vehicle is moving
at a certain speed. If you cannot shift
to reverse when the vehicle is
stopped, do the following:
With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
1.
2.
3.
4.
64
6-speed manual transmission
On Si model
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission
Driving
259
Table de matières
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
To shift from Park to any position,
press the brake pedal, the release
button on the front of the shift lever,
then pull the lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
260
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LEVER
Table de matières
−
−
−
−
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
3
3
3
3
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button to
shift from Park to reverse. To shift
from reverse to neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.263
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Park (P)
Shift Lock Release
Reverse (R)
Drive (D)
Neutral (N)
Driving
261
Table de matières
−−
−
This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third, fourth, and fifth gears
in stop-and-go driving.
To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button. This
position locks the transmission in
first gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,
you can operate the transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D ) Second (2)
First (1)
Engine Speed Limiter
3
262
Table de matières
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
and pressing the release button does
not let you shift the transmission out
of Park:
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Insert the built-in key into the shift
lock release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the lever out
of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the shift lever side.
Return the key to the ignition
switch, press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover to
prevent scratches. Using a small
flat-tip screwdriver or a metal
fingernail file, carefully pry on the
notch of the cover to remove it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
263
COVER
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE SLOT
NOTCH
Table de matières
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Turn off the lights.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Lock the doors.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
On vehicles with security system
Parking Tips
Parking
264
Never install a sunshade between the
upper and lower meters on the
instrument panel. If you do, you could
cause heat damage to the upper meter
on a very hot day.
Table de matières
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Braking System Design
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
Braking System
Driving
265
Table de matières
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helpspreventthewheelsfrom
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
341
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
266
Table de matières
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
341
On vehicles with VSA system
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
Important Safety Reminders
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
267
Table de matières
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA Activation indicator blinks.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
269
On U.S. models
If equipped
VSA Activation Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
268
NOTE:
Table de matières
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
320
VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tire Sizes
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
269
Table de matières
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Becausetirepressurevariesby
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
326
U.S. models only
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
270
Table de matières
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
maybecomeoverinflated.However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
Refer to page for tire inflation
guidelines.
When you restart the vehicle with
thecompactsparetire,theTPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page ).
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
314
315
269
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving
271
Table de matières
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page ).
Each wheel (except the compact
sparetirewheel)isequippedwitha
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire with
thecompactsparetire,thelowtire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
326
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
272
Table de matières
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Theweightthatthe
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
273
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Table de matières
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the rear axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
(Si) (Si)
(DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, Canadian
DX-G)
(EX-L, U.S. EX, Canadian Sport)
(DX, U.S. LX, LX-S, Canadian
DX-G)
(EX-L, U.S. EX, Canadian Sport)
Checking Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Towing a Trailer
274
3,671 lbs (1,665 kg)
1,731 lbs (785 kg)
1,940 lbs (880 kg)
3,737 lbs (1,695 kg)
3,924 lbs (1,780 kg)
1,973 lbs (895 kg)
1,764 lbs (800 kg)
2,094 lbs (950 kg)
1,830 lbs (830 kg)
Table de matières
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow. If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, provincial, territorial,
and local regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
CONTINUED
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Trailer BrakesHitches
Saf ety Chains
Towing a Trailer
Driving
275
Table de matières
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, provincial,
territorial, and local regulations.
Check with your local trailer dealer
or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you
plan to tow, and use only equipment
designed for your vehicle.
Many states and Canadian
provinces/territories require special
outside mirrors when towing a trailer.
Even if they don’t, you should install
special mirrors if you cannot clearly
see behind you, or if the trailer
creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
276
Table de matières
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left, and
turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension,
cooling system, and lights are in
good operating condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
273 274
bottom
Pre-Tow Checklist
Backing Up
Parking
Handling Crosswinds and Buf feting
Towing a Trailer
Driving
277
Table de matières
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic
transmission, use the D position
when towing a trailer on level roads.
D is the proper shift lever position
to use when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain. (See ‘‘ ’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
3
3
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Driving on Hills
Towing a Trailer
278
Table de matières
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
......................
Maintenance Safety . 280
....................Maintenance Minder . 281
..............................Fluid Locations . 288
........................Adding Engine Oil . 290
Changing the Engine Oil
....................................and Filter . 292
..............................Engine Coolant . 294
....................Windshield Washers . 297
.......................Transmission Fluid . 298
..........Automatic Transmission . 298
..............Manual Transmission . 299
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 300
....................Power Steering Fluid . 301
.............................................Lights . 302
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 309
.....................................Floor Mats . 310
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 310
.................................Wiper Blades . 311
...........................................Wheels . 313
...............................................Tires . 314
...................Checking the Battery . 322
.............................Vehicle Storage . 324
373
Maintenance
Maintenance
279
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or qualified
mechanic.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
280
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the SEL/
RESET button repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page ).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the information display
according to this table:
66
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
281
SEL/RESET BUTTON
ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY
Table of Contents
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicators remind you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
Maintenance Minder
282
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
SERVICE MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE (S)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
Table of Contents
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative distance
traveled is displayed and begins to
blink after the vehicle has been
driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
( ) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
You can switch the display to the
odometer, the trip meter, and the
outside temperature indicator (if
equipped) by pushing the SEL/
RESET button on the dashboard
repeatedly.
Whentheengineoillifeis15to1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator ( ) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
284
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
283
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the SEL/RESET button.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative distance traveled, the
maintenance minder indicator
( )remainsonevenifyou
change the information display.
Immediately have the service done,
andmakesuretoresetthedisplay
(see Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display).
1.
2.287
Maintenance Minder
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
284
MAINTENANCE
SUB ITEM
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the SEL/RESET button for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
Press the SEL/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
4.3.
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
285
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
＃
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
241
243
298
300
314
302
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
286
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance Minder
287
:
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the second
column on page .
Independent of the maintenance minder indicator in the information
display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
NOTE:
1:
286
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
Maintenance Minder
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Fluid Locations
Except Si model
288
RADIATOR CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
: Except Canadian DX-G with manual transmission
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
Si model
289
RADIATOR CAP
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Table of Contents
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour the
oil slowly and carefully so you do not
spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
290
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Except Si
Si
Table of Contents
−
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F ( 7°C).
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle, to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
All models except Si:
Si model:
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
291
Ambient Temperature
Ambient Temperature
Table of Contents
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1. 2.
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
292
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
Except Si Si
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the contacting surface
of a new oil filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3. 4.
Except Si
Si
CONTINUED
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Maintenance
293
OIL FILTER
Except Si
Si
3.9 US qt (3.7 )
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
add more oil.
9. Adding Engine Coolant
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
294
RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK
Si
Except Si
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Table of Contents
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
295
RADIATOR CAP
Except Si
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Table of Contents
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Engine Coolant
296
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK
Si Except Si Si
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
64
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
297
LEVEL GAUGE
LEVEL GAUGE
Except Si
Si
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spills immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Genuine
ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission
fluid).
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
298
DIPSTICK
LOWER
MARK
UPPER
MARK
Table of Contents
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification Seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The automatic transmission should
be drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
6.
CONTINUED
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission
Maintenance
299
FILLER BOLT
Correct Level
FILLER BOLT
Correct Level
Except Si Si
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission f luid). Do not
mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
The manual transmission should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Replace the brake fluid according to
thetimerecommendationsinthe
maintenance minder schedule.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
Brake SystemBrake and Clutch Fluid
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
300
MAX
MIN
Table of Contents
Manual Transmission only All models except Si and Canadian DX-G
with manual transmission
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering FluidClutch Fluid
Maintenance
301
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
MAX
MIN
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
To change the headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its holder.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be done by your dealer or
another qualified technician.
1.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
High Beam Headlight
Lights
302
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Table of Contents
Ifyoureplacedaheadlightbulbon
the driver’s side, reinstall the
engine coolant reserve tank. To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
2.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
CONTINUED
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
Maintenance
303
TAB
HOLDING CLIPBULB
Table of Contents
To change the bulb on the driver’s
side, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
right, then turn off the engine. To
change the bulb on the passenger’s
side, turn the steering wheel to the
left.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
andlocktheminplacebypushing
on their centers.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
5.
6.
1.
7.
8.
3.
4.
Lights
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
304
TAB
HOLDING CLIP
SOCKET
Table of Contents
Open the trunk.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
Remove the bulb from the socket
by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
Remove the screw from the center
of each fastener on the side of the
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, back-
up light, turn signal, or side
marker.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
Reinstall the inner fender cover.
Then reinstall the holding clips,
andlocktheminplacebypushing
on their centers.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
2.
2.
CONTINUED
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(In Fenders)
Lights
Maintenance
305
FASTENER
FASTENER
Table of Contents
Open the trunk.Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Put the fasteners into the holes on
the side of the trunk lining.
Reinstall the screws.
Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
Remove the screw from the center
of each fastener on the trunk lid
trim. Pull the trim back.
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
OnallEX-L,CanadianSport,andSi
models
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Trunk Lid)
306
BULBS
SOCKETS
SOCKETS
BULB
FASTENERS
BULB
Table of Contents
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
Put the fasteners into the holes on
the trunk lid trim. Reinstall the
screws.
Push the trunk lid trim back into
position.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
the new bulb is working.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Open the trunk, and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.
Except Si model
OnallEX-L,CanadianSport,andSi
models
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Maintenance
307
BULB
SOCKET
BULB
SOCKET
Table of Contents
To remove the fog light assembly,
use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw, then carefully
pull it out of the bumper.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case, and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Thefoglightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
1.
2.
On Si model
Lights
ReplacingaFogLightBulb
308
SCREW
Halogen light bulbs get very hot when
lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on
the glass can cause the bulb to overheat
and shatter.
Table of Contents
Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
Align the two tabs on the fog light
assembly with the holes in the
bumper, then push the fog light
assembly into place. Tighten the
screw securely.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the bulb. Make sure it is on all the
way.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
6.
7.
3.
4.
5.
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Maintenance
309
TAB
TAB
CONNECTOR
BULB
LOOP
Table of Contents
If equipped
On models with A/C
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomeslessthanusual.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
theycanbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
putitbackinyourvehicle.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
Make sure the rear floor mats are
properly positioned. If not, the floor
mat will interfere with the seat
operation and make the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
Floor Mats Dust and Pollen Filter
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
310
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
To replace a wiper blade:
Lift the wiper arm off the
windshield, raising the driver’s
side first, then the passenger’s
side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Put a cloth on the edge of the
lock tab to prevent scratches,
then push up on the lock tab
carefully with a flat-tip
screwdriver.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
311
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
Table of Contents
Pivot the blade assembly toward
the wiper arm until it releases
from the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch of
the reinforcement, as shown.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
3.
4.
Wiper Blades
312
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
WIPER ARM
TOP
Table of Contents
Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Push down
thelocktab.Makesurethewiper
blade assembly locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
Make sure the tab on the blade
assembly fits in the indent of the
wiper blade and the blade is
completely installed.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
5.
6.
7.
If equipped
Wiper Blades, Wheels
Wheels
Maintenance
313
INDENT
TAB
Table of Contents
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Thetirepressuremonitoringsystem
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
270
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
314
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Table of Contents
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings.Thisisnormal.Donotlet
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
The following charts show the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
(Si)
(DX, Canadian DX-G with automatic
transmission)
(Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission)
(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, Canadian
Sport)
357
Optional for U.S. Si
Tire Size
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Cold Tire PressureTire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
Maintenance
315
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
215/45ZR17 91W
P215/45R17 87V
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm
)
P195/65R15 89H
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
P195/65R15 89S
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
P205/55R16 89H
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
Front/Rear:
Table of Contents
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Tire pressure for high-speed driving
is the same as for normal driving.
When you return to normal speed
driving, be sure to readjust the tire
pressure for normal driving. You
should wait until the tires are cold
before adjusting the tire pressure.
For convenience, the recommended
cold air pressures and tire sizes are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressuresasshowninthenext
column. If you do not, excessive heat
can build up and cause sudden tire
failure.
Front/Rear:
357
Si model only
Except Si model
Si model only
Tires
Tire InspectionTire Size·Cold Tire Pressure for
High Speed Driving
High Speed Driving
316
P215/45R17 87V
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm
)
Table of Contents
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See
on page ).
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
359
Tires
Tire Service Life
Tire
Labeling
Maintenance
317
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
The tires that came on your vehicle
were designed and constructed to
provide superior grip during
acceleration, braking, and cornering.
As a trade-off, they will wear more
rapidly than tires used on ordinary
passenger vehicles. Because of the
vehicle’s weight distribution, and the
fact that the front wheels are the
driving wheels, you can expect them
to wear more rapidly than the rear
tires.
On Si model only
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Tire Wear
Tires
318
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
Table of Contents
Themileageyoucanexpectfrom
yourvehicletiresisthesameas
comparable mid-and rear-engine
sports cars, and it will vary greatly
with your driving habits.
If you drive moderately, the front
tires could last more than 10,000
miles (16,000 km). However, the
mileage will be substantially less if
you tend to drive your vehicle at the
upper limits of its capabilities.
You should carefully inspect your
vehicle’s tires for wear, damage, and
proper inflation every 7,500 miles
(12,000 km).
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the ABS or VSA system to
activate.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels (if equipped). If you
do not, the tire pressure monitoring
system will not work.
CONTINUED
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Maintenance
319
Table of Contents
Wheels:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
Tires:
(DX, Canadian DX-G)
(Si)
(Si)
(DX, Canadian DX-G with
automatic transmission)
(all season tire)
(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,
Canadian Sport)
(EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX,
Canadian Sport)
(summer tire)
(Canadian DX-G with manual
transmission)
357
359
Optional for U.S. Si
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Tires
320
15x6J
215/45ZR17 91W
P215/45R17 87V
P205/55R16 89H
P195/65R15 89S
P195/65R15 89H
17x7J
16x61/2J
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Table of Contents
＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
If your vehicle is equipped with
summer tires, be aware that these
tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more
information, consult your dealer.
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN
SC1030
Cable-type: SCC RADIAL CHAIN
SC1032
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
CONTINUED
Except DX and Canadian DX-G models
On DX and Canadian DX-G models
U.S. Si model only
Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Summer Tires
Tires
Maintenance
321
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Table of Contents
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
Checking the Battery
Tires, Checking the Battery
322
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Except Si Si
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Table of Contents
−
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
).
The navigation system will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting will be reset to 1:00. To set
the time again, follow the setting
procedure (see page ).
206
207
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
Maintenance
323
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
Table of Contents
Fill the fuel tank.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fan cycles twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
Vehicle Storage
324
Table of Contents
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................
Compact Spare Tire . 326
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 327
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 332
................................Jump Starting . 334
..............If the Engine Overheats . 337
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 339
..........Charging System Indicator . 339
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 340
...............Brake System Indicator . 341
..............................................Fuses . 342
..............................Fuse Locations . 346
......................Emergency Towing . 348
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
325
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Follow these precautions:
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not mount tire chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not use a compact spare tire
mounted on a front wheel; it will
damage the limited slip differential
(see page ).
On vehicles with the TPMS
system, the low tire pressure
indicator comes on and stays on
after you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire. After
several miles (kilometers) driving
with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS indicator comes on and the
low tire pressure indicator goes off.
327
On Si model
Compact Spare Tire
326
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Table of Contents
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (automatic)
or reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
Take the tool case out of the spare
tire.
Unscrew the wing bolt, and take
the spare tire out of its well.
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Thecompactsparetireissmaller
than a standard tire, and it will affect
the vehicle’s handling. Drive
cautiously when the spare is
mounted on your vehicle.
Thesizedifferencemayalsocause
damage to the differential, so do not
mount the compact spare on the
front. If either front tire goes flat,
removethereartireonthatsame
side, mount the compact spare tire
on the rear, then mount the rear tire
on the front.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
On Si model only
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
327
SPARE TIRE
TRUNK FLOOR
JACK TOOL CASE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Table of Contents
Placethejackunderthejacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.Remove the center cap from the
wheel with the extension.
6. 7.
Canadian DX-G model
Changing a Flat Tire
328
JACKING POINTS
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
10.8.
9.
DX and U.S. LX models:
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
329
WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUTS
WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
13.
11.
12.
14.
On EX-L, Si, U.S. EX, LX-S, and
Canadian Sport models
Changing a Flat Tire
330
CENTER CAP
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Table of Contents
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Lower the trunk floor, and close
the trunk lid.
Store the jack and tools in the tool
case. Place the tool case in the
center of the flat tire.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
(see
page ).
15.
16.
17.
18. 19.
20.
21.
272
CONTINUED
On U.S. models
Changing a Flat Tire
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Taking Care of the Unexpected
331
WING BOLT
SPACER
CONE
For normal
tire
For spare
tire
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
334
348
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
IftheEngineWon’tStart
332
Table of Contents
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
).
79
322
334
256
342
348
Emergency
Towing
Starting the
Engine
The Starter Operates Normally
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
333
Table of Contents
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
To jump start your vehicle:
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
Turn off all the electrical
accessories: heater, A/C, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in neutral (manual)
or Park (automatic), and set the
parking brake.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
1.
2.
Jump Starting
334
Except Si
BOOSTER BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Table of Contents
−＋
＋
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
6.4.
5.
3.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
335
Si Except Si Si
BOOSTER BATTERY
Table of Contents
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
7.
Jump Starting
336
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The reading of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you
should take immediate action. The
only indication may be the
temperature gauge climbing to or
above the red mark. Or you may
see steam or spray coming from
under the hood.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
1.
2.
IftheEngineOverheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
337
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
reading at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Table of Contents
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the reading
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
7.
8.
9.3.
4.
5.
6.
10.
11.348
243
348
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
IftheEngineOverheats
338
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Table of Contents
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
241
290
348
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
339
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once.
Tightening the cap will not turn the
indicator off immediately; it can take
several days of normal driving.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to for
more information (see page ).366
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
340
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Table of Contents
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
the brake system indicator, have
your vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
300
348
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
341
CanadaU.S.
Table of Contents
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side, next to the brake fluid
reservoir. To open it, push the tabs
as shown.
Thefusesareintwofuseboxes.The
interior fuse box is underneath the
steering column.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. The diagram for
the interior driver’s side fuse box is
on the kick panel below the fuse box.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
346 347
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
342
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD
TAB
FUSE LABEL
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
pullerprovidedonthebackofthe
under-hood fuse box cover.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
1.
2.
3. 4.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
343
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
FUSE
BLOWN
Table of Contents
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the under-hood fuse box
cover.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate that anything is wrong.
Replace the fuse with one of the
correct rating as soon as you can.
5.
Fuses
344
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
SPARE FUSES
Table of Contents
When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock (see page ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system may disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page ).
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
6.
206
207
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
345
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
No.
No. Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
Amps.
Amps.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1
2
3
Main Fuse
EPS
Option Main
Ignition Switch Main
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA F/S
Headlight Main
Power Window Main
Not Used
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor (M/T)
Main Fan Motor (A/T)
Rear Defogger
Blower
Hazard
FI Sub
Stop and Horn
Not Used
Not Used
IGPS Oil Level
Not Used
Audio Amp
IG Coil
FI Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up
100 A
(70 A)
60 A
50 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
50 A
40 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
(15 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
1:
2:
If equipped
On models with VSA system
1
1
2
Fuse Locations
346
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. No.
No.
Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
(15 A)
(20 A)
(7.5 A)
Power Window
Fuel Pump
Alternator
ABS/VSA
Heated Seat
Front Fog Light
TPMS
Not Used
ODS
METER
SRS
Right Headlight High Beam
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light (Interior)
Small Light (Exterior)
Right Headlight Low Beam
10 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
(15 A)
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
Left Headlight Low Beam
Headlight High Beam Main
Small Lights (Main)
Not Used
Headlight Low Beam Main
Not Used
Not Used
Moonroof
Door Lock
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
Rear Accessory Socket
Accessory
Passenger’s Power Window
Not Used
Right Rear Power Window
Left Rear Power Window
Not Used
Accessory Radio
HAC
Daytime Running Light
Front Wiper
If equipped
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
347
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Table of Contents
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on
the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below35mph(55km/h).
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Release the parking brake.
Turn off the engine.
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N.
Manual transmission:
Automatic transmission:
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lif t Equipment
This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
This is an acceptable
way to tow your vehicle.
Emergency Towing
348
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
f ront wheels of f the ground.
Table of Contents
Do not tie down the vehicle at an
angle that would allow the towing
cables to contact the vehicle’s front
bumper. To avoid possible damage,
protect the front bumper with tape.
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
349
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely before you begin
towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
Table of Contents
−
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................
Identification Numbers . 352
................................Specifications . 354
DOT Tire Quality Grading
......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 357
.................................Treadwear . 357
......................................Traction . 357
.............................Temperature . 358
.................................Tire Labeling . 359
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Required
.............Federal Explanation . 361
.......................Emissions Controls . 363
.....................The Clean Air Act . 363
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 363
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 363
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 363
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 364
....................PGM-FI System . 364
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 364
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 364
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 364
....................Replacement Parts . 364
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 365
........................Emissions Testing . 366
Technical Information
Technical Information
351
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
The VIN is also located on the
engine bulkhead. Slide the cover on
the engine compartment bulkhead to
view the VIN. Always close the cover
when finished.
Identification Numbers
352
CERTIFICATION LABEL
COVER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
Table of Contents
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
353
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Except Si
Si
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
354
Dimensions
Weights
Engine
Seating Capacities
177.3 in (4,504 mm)
69.0 in (1,752 mm)
56.5 in (1,435 mm)
106.3 in (2,700 mm)
59.0 in (1,499 mm)
60.2 in (1,528 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Spark plugs
3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm)
3.39x3.39in(86x86mm)
110 cu-in (1,799 cm
)
122 cu-in (1,998 cm
)
10.5
11.0
IZFR6K11S
SKJ20DR-M11S
IFR7G11KS
SK22PR-M11STotal
Front
Rear
5
2
3
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC i-VTEC , DOHC i-VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Except Si
Si
NGK:
DENSO:
NGK:
DENSO:
1
2
12
1
2
1
2
2
1
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
355
Air ConditioningCapacities
Lights
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant oil type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)
SP-10
12 V 60 W (HB3)
12 V 51 W (HB4)
12 V 24/2 CP
12 V 21 W
12 V 21/5 W
12 V 2 CP
12 V 21 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 21 W
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
1.8 US qt (1.7
)
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
1.19 US gal (4.5 )
1.80 US gal (6.8
)
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
5.8 US qt (5.5 )
6.08 US qt (5.75
)
2.5 US qt (2.4
)
1.40 US gal (5.3
)
1.77 US gal (6.7
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
1.7 US qt (1.6
)
1.5 US qt (1.4 )
1.37 US gal (5.2
)
1.72 US gal (6.5
)
3.9 US qt (3.7
)
3.7 US qt (3.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
13.2 US gal (50
)Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual
transmission
fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Headlights
Front turn signal/side marker/
Parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Rear side marker lights
Back-up lights
Taillights
High-mount brake light
Fog lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light 12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
5W
8W
8W
5W
12 V 55 W
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4
)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
High
Low
A/T
M/T
A/T
M/T
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
Approx.
Except Si
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
(Amber)
(Amber)
(H11)
Si
Except DX, Canadian DX-G
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
13
3
4
3
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
4
5
3
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
＊＊
Specifications
356
Fuses
Alignment
Battery Tires
P195/65R15 89H
Interior
Under-hood
Toe-in
Camber
Caster 7°24’
0°45’
0°
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 12 V
12 V
12 V
36 AH/5 HR
38 AH/5 HR
45 AH/20 HR
47 AH/20 HR
12 V
12 V 38 AH/5 HR
47 AH/20 HR
12 V
T135/80R16 101M
T125/70D15 95M
215/45ZR17 91W
P215/45R17 87V
P205/55R16 89H
P195/65R15 89S
Size
PressureSee page 347 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the steering
column.
See page 346 or the fuse box
cover.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
T135/80D16 101M
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Spare
U.S.
Vehicles
Canada
Vehicles
Front/Rear
Spare
Si (all season tires)
Canadian DX-G with manual transmission
DX, Canadian DX-G with automatic transmission
Except EX-L, Si
EX-L, U.S. LX, LX-S, EX, Canadian Sport
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Optional for U.S. Si (summer tires)
Si
U.S. EX-L
Si, Canadian EX-L
3
1
2
4
5
7
7
6
9
4, 6
3
1, 2
8, 9
Table of Contents
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
357
Table of Contents
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
358
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Year
Week
P
55
R
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
89
H
CONTINUED
Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Size
Tire Labeling
Technical Information
359
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Tire Size
Maximum Tire Load
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
(3)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(4)
DOT B97R FW6X 2202P205/55R16 89H
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Maximum Load Rating Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI)
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
Maximum Inflation Pressure The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Load Rating Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Tire Labeling
Glossary of Tire Terminology
360
Table of Contents
−
U.S. models only
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Information
361
Table of Contents
−
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
362
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
363
Table of Contents
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust emissions controls
includethreeorfoursystems:
PGM-FI, ignition timing control,
exhaust gas recirculation, and three
way catalytic converter. These
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2
2
Except Si model
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
364
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
365
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Except Si model
Si model
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm,andholditthereuntilthe
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(about3minutes).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Emissions Testing
366
Table of Contents
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (automatic) or 5th (manual). Do
notusethecruisecontrol.When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
7. 8.
9.
Emissions Testing
Technical Information
367
Table of Contents
368
Table of Contents
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
352
Customer Service Information
370
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
Visit www.honda.ca for contact
information
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Customer Relations
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2010 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2010 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perf oration Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
371
Table of Contents
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from .
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
372
http://www.saf ercar.gov
http://www.saf ercar.gov
Table of Contents
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
(U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
Authorized Manuals
373
Publication
Form Number
61SNA0A
61SNA0AEL
61SNA30
31SNA640
31SNA830
31SNAM40
31SNAQ40
HON-R
Form Description
2006-2010 Honda Civic 2/4 Door Service Manual
2006-2010 Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2006-2010 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door
Body Repair Manual
2010 Honda Civic 4 Door Owner’s Manual
2010 Honda Civic
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2010 Honda Civic Honda Service History
2010 Honda Civic 4 Door Technology Reference Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired
www. helminc. com
Table of Contents
Service Information Summary
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:Gasoline:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Recommended Engine Oil:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Manual Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Except Si
Si
Except Si
Si
Except Si
Si
All models except Si and
Canadian DX-G (M/T)
EX-L,U.S.LX,LX-S,EX,
Canadian Sport
DX, Canadian DX-G
Si
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
4.6 US qt (4.4
)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
API Premium grade 5W-30
detergent oil (see page ).
3.9 US qt (3.7
)
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
13.2 US gal (50
)
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Capacity (including differential):
1.5 US qt (1.4
)
1.6 US qt (1.5
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid)
(see page ).
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Spare Tire:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher recommended (see ‘‘Fuel
Recommendations’’ on page ).238
291
291
298
299
301
300
